JP7225837B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there are a ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter, a first state in which the ball entry portion can or is likely to accept a game ball, and a game ball inability or acceptance in the ball entry portion. and a variable receiving means that can be switched to a second state in which it is difficult for the user to operate the system (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2004-81853

Here, in gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing attention to a game.

The present invention
a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering section;
information storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
attachment determination means for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. a game round control means for executing the game round at
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information;
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means switchable between states;
A variable acceptance control that switches the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state based on a predetermined specific trigger, and then executes variable acceptance control to switch the variable acceptance means to the second state at least once. an admission control means;
with
The variable acceptance control means
first control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control for establishment when the specific trigger occurs in a first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied;
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation in which the specific condition is not established, the variable acceptance control for failure to accept the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the ball entrance section than the variable acceptance control for establishment can be executed. a second control means;
with
When the first situation changes to the second situation, the first game cycle after the second situation can be started after a predetermined period has passed since the second situation. and
When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
The mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode in which the period during which the variable acceptance control can be executed is longer than the predetermined period.

According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an expanded state; FIG. (a) is a front view showing the configuration of a game board, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining game rounds. (a) is a schematic diagram of the second working port in the closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the second working port in the open state. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the open state. (a) is a longitudinal sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the side, and (b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the rear. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) is an explanatory diagram of a right/wrong table for the first special figure, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a right/wrong table for the second special figure. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type table for the first special figure, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type table for the second special figure. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the small hit type table for the first special figure, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the small hit type table for the second special figure, (c) is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type table for the V jackpot is. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a low allocation mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a high allocation mode. (a) is an explanatory diagram of a general-map validity table for a low-frequency support mode, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a general-pattern validity table for a high-frequency support mode. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a low winning role opening and closing game, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a high winning role opening and closing game. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart showing a special figure game round control process. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart showing a special figure fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart showing the setting process of the special figure fluctuation display time. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table A for the second special figure, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table B for the second special figure, (c) is the first after the end of the high frequency support mode 2 It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game times of the special figure and the opening and closing game of the general electric role. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special figure decision display. It is a flow chart showing a transition process to a small winning game state. It is a flowchart which shows the opening-and-closing process for small hits. It is a flow chart showing end processing of a small winning game. 9 is a flowchart showing V allocation setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for V winning a prize. It is a flow chart showing a transition process to a jackpot gaming state. It is a flow chart showing a transition process at the end of the jackpot game. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for ending the high-frequency support mode; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for completion|finish of a specific state. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. It is a flow chart showing normal figure game round control processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation start processing. It is a schematic diagram showing a normal figure game round. It is a flow chart showing normal figure game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows role object opening and closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each opening/closing control; It is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game during the high-frequency support mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game at the end of the high-frequency support mode and after the end; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect according to the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process for special production|presentations performed by MPU of a production|presentation control apparatus. (a) is a flow chart showing a comprehension process of the number SA of pending additions, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the comprehension process. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the special effect. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable display time table B for the second special figure according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a prize-winning process for operation openings. It is a flow chart which shows processing for reservation confirmation. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special effects. It is a flow chart which shows a comprehension process of the number SA which can be added on hold. It is a flowchart which shows the update processing of the number SA which can be added pending. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the special effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of the special effect. It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing special effect processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing remaining period grasping processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining processing for grasping the remaining period; It is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect. It is a flow chart showing processing for special figure confirmation display according to the fifth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation display time table B for 2nd special figures. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the open type table A for normal maps in the low frequency support mode, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the open type table B for normal maps in the high frequency support mode. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first high prize opening and closing game, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second high prize opening and closing game, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the third high prize opening and closing game. is. It is a flow chart showing normal figure game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows role object opening and closing processing. 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing for each opening/closing control; It is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation display control processing. (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of normal pattern game round production, (b) is a flowchart showing normal pattern fluctuation start processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table B for the second special figure according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the release type table for the normal figure in the high frequency support mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. (a) is a front view of the 1st special-figure display part based on 7th Embodiment, (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the area|region including the 1st special-figure display part and its front side. It is an explanatory diagram of a stop result table for selecting a stop result for the jackpot of the first special figure. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type table for the first special figure, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type table for the second special figure. It is a flow chart showing the setting process of the special figure fluctuation display time. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table B1 for the second special figure, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time table B2 for the second special figure. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation display control process. It is a flow chart showing processing for special figure fluctuation start. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop result stop-displayed by the 1st special figure display part, and the stop result of the symbol sequence stop-displayed by the symbol display apparatus. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop result displayed in the first special figure display unit and the variable display time table of the second special figure selected in a specific state, (b) is a pattern It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop result of the symbol sequence stopped and displayed on the display device and the variable display time table of the second special symbol selected in the specific state. It is a figure which shows another example of a universal electric accessory.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded state. 2, the configuration within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable backward with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area to be described later to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but is not limited to this and may be made of transparent and colorless synthetic resin.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61 . A display light-emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as part of the various lamp portions. Speaker units 64 are provided on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge forward, are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65 , and a lower plate 72 that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66 . The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71 .

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 72 in the front door frame 14 . When the shooting handle 60 is operated, a game ball is shot toward the game area PE from a game ball shooting mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13 . In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 60, the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area PE, that is, the momentum of shooting is changed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting handle 60 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PE every 0.6 seconds. be.

The game area PE is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13 . The configuration of the game board 24 will be described below with reference to FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE. A game area PE is formed in this way. In addition, the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 form a guide rail 54 for guiding the game ball to the game area PE, and the game ball is fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 53 by rotating the shooting handle 60 by the player. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail 54 .

The guide rail 54 is formed on one side of the game area PE so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60 by the player increases, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE shifts from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the side. The exit portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side of the game area PE.

A plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the area of the game board 24 that is defined as the game area PE by router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a first variable winning device 32A, a second variable winning device 32B, a first operating port (or a first starting ball part) 33, a second operating port (or a second starting ball) section) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure display section 43 as a main display section, a normal figure display section 44 as a character object display section, and the like are provided. Note that a plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. be. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33, four balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second working port 34, one ball is paid out. is executed, and when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are put out. Also, when a ball enters the first variable prize winning device 32A, 15 prize balls are put out, and when a ball enters the second variable prize winning device 32B, three prize balls are paid out. is paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. The number of prize balls related to the number of prize balls may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operation port 33 . Also, the number of prize balls associated with the first variable winning device 32A may be the same as or less than the number of prize balls associated with other operating ports. Further, the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B may have the same number of prize balls, or the latter may have more prize balls than the former.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. - 特許庁Even if the game ball enters the out port 37, the prize ball is not paid out. The game board 24 is also provided with a large number of nails 38 for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, entering a ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A non-discharging mode is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operation port 33, The entry of the game ball into the second operation opening 34 and the through gate 35 is also expressed as winning a prize.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, there is a region where the game balls shot to the game region PE can flow down. partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PE, an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area that is continuous with the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left area PE2 which is an area on the left, a right area PE3 which is an area continuous below the upper area PE1 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, and a left area PE2 and a right area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PE4 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

Which of these areas PE1 to PE4 the game area flows down (passes through) is determined by the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 60, that is, the force of shooting the game ball. Specifically, when the player rotates the shooting handle 60 as the first shooting operation with a rotation operation amount in a first range that is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and is less than the reference rotation amount, The shot game ball is more likely to be launched leftward from the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of upper area PE1→left area PE2→lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player performs the rotation operation of the shooting handle 60 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, the shot game ball is placed in the upper region PE1. It is easier to launch to the right than the center position in the horizontal direction. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper area PE1→right area PE3→lower area PE4. In other words, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 60, it is determined whether the game ball is to be played in the left route in which the game ball flows down the left region PE2 or in the right route in which the game ball flows down the right region PE3. , can be selected by the player.

The reference rotation amount is a rotation operation amount at which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left region PE2 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 are the same or substantially the same. is a rotation operation amount that allows the shot game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE. With the rotation operation amount in the first range, the percentage of game balls flowing down the left region PE2 increases, and with the rotation operation amount in the second range, the percentage of game balls flowing down the right region PE3 increases.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower region PE4. The first operating port 33 is open upward and is not provided with a member for opening and closing. And, in a situation where the game ball is shot in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operation opening 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In addition, the first operation port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and the game ball that has flowed onto the stage 36b through the guide passage formed in the variable display unit 36. A game ball ejected from the center of the stage 36b to the outside of the variable display unit 36 easily enters the first operating port 33.例文帳に追加A winning sensor 33a for the first working opening is provided in the first working opening 33, and a game ball that has won the first working opening 33 is detected by the winning sensor 33a.

Here, regarding the first operation port 33, a game ball flowing down the left route can win (can be reached), and a game ball flowing down the right route cannot win (can not reach). That is, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 38 in the left area PE2, the right area PE3, and the lower area PE4 is configured to allow the game ball flowing down the left area PE2 to reach the first operation opening 33. On the other hand, it is configured not to allow the game ball that has flowed down the right side region PE3 to reach the first operating port 33. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize to the first operation opening 33, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the left route.

The second operating port 34 is installed in the right region PE3. The configuration of the second operating port 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(a) and 5(b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second operating port 34. FIG.

The second operation port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The general electric accessory 34a is connected to a general electric drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the general electric drive unit 34b to enter the closed state shown in FIG. 5(a). (non-supporting state or non-guiding state) and the open state (supporting state or guiding state) shown in FIG. 5(b). A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state. Incidentally, in the open state, the universal electrical accessory 34a protrudes toward the game area PE side and guides the winning to the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加A winning sensor 34c for the second working opening is provided in the second working opening 34, and a game ball that has won the second working opening 34 is detected by the winning sensor 34c.

It should be noted that the state where the winning of the game ball to the second operation opening 34 is likely to occur, and the state where the winning is not impossible but is more difficult to occur than the above-mentioned state where the winning is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure which can be switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be configured to switch between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is more difficult to occur by moving or rotating in the front-rear direction.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set in which the forms of support by the general electric role item 34a are different. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where game balls continue to be shot in a similar manner to the game area PE, the frequency at which the general electric accessory 34a becomes open per unit time Low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) so that is set.

In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, when a winning to the second operating port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the balls in his possession.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 35 is provided above (upstream side) the second operation port 34 in the right region PE3. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) that penetrates in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has entered the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PE after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁The through gate 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the game ball entering the through gate 35 is detected by the detection sensor 35a.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, the result of the internal lottery is the open result (support winning), the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is terminated. When the opening and closing game (support execution mode) is executed. In the accessory opening/closing game, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

For the second operation port 34 and the through gate 35, winning is not possible when the shooting handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, and the game ball does not pass through the right side area PE3. Winning is possible when the shooting handle 60 is operated so as to flow down. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize to the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35, the game ball is shot so that the game ball flows down the right route.

A first variable winning device 32A is arranged below the first operation opening 33 in the lower region PE4. The configuration of the first variable winning device 32A will be described with reference to FIG.

The first variable prize winning device 32A includes a first big prize winning port 321 that opens to the front of the pachinko machine 10 and an opening/closing door 322 that opens and closes the first big prize winning port 321 . The first big winning hole 321 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to win simultaneously. The first big prize winning port 321 communicates with a guide passage 324 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and all the game balls winning the first big prize winning port 321 are guided to the guide passage 324. ing. The guide passage 324 is provided with a first big winning hole detection sensor 325 that detects the passage of a game ball, and the first big winning hole detection sensor 325 detects the movement of the game ball to the first big winning hole 321. A win is detected.

In addition, a driving section 323 for driving the opening/closing door 322 is provided in the first variable winning device 32A. The open/close door 322 is driven by a drive unit 323 through a link mechanism (not shown), so that a game ball can enter the first big winning hole 321 in an open state (FIG. 6(b)) and the first big winning hole. At 321, the state is switched to the closed state (FIG. 6(a)) in which the game ball cannot win a prize.

In addition, when the first variable prize winning device 32A (opening and closing door 322) is in a closed state, it is not necessary to make it impossible to win a prize in the first big prize winning port 321, and it is within a range where it is difficult to win a prize compared to the open state. A configuration may be adopted in which a prize can be won. The point is that the easiness of winning the first prize-winning opening 321 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, with respect to the first variable winning device 32A, the first variable winning device is configured so that the game ball can win only when the shooting handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. The arrangement of the pegs 38 and the game parts in the periphery of the device 32A is set. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize in the first variable prize winning device 32A, the game ball is played by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, a second variable winning device 32B is arranged in the right area PE3 diagonally below the variable display unit 36 (on the downstream side of the second operation opening 34). The configuration of the second variable winning device 32B will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the second variable prize winning device 32B includes a second big prize winning port 351 that opens in front of the pachinko machine 10, and an opening/closing door 352 that opens and closes the second big prize winning port 351. there is A drive unit 353 that drives the opening/closing door 352 is provided in the second variable winning device 32B. The open/close door 352 is driven by the drive unit 353 through a link mechanism (not shown), so that the open state in which the game ball can enter the second large prize winning port 351 and the game ball cannot enter the second large prize winning port 351. is switched to a closed state of

In addition, when the second variable prize winning device 32B (opening and closing door 352) is in a closed state, it is not necessary to make it impossible to win a prize to the second big prize winning port 351, and it is within a range where it is difficult to win a prize compared to the open state. A configuration may be adopted in which a prize can be won. The point is that the easiness of winning the second prize winning opening 351 is different between the open state and the closed state, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

The second big winning hole 351 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to win simultaneously. The second big prize winning port 351 communicates with a guide passage 354 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and all the game balls winning the second big prize winning port 351 are guided to the guide passage 354. ing.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the guide passage 354 is bifurcated from its midway position, and constitutes one of an upstream region 355 forming the upstream side of the branching position and a downstream region of the branching position. V winning area (or useful area) 356, and discharge area (or unusable area) 357 constituting the other on the downstream side of the branch position. Also, at the branch position, a distribution member 358 is provided as distribution means for distributing the game balls that have reached the branch position from the upstream area 355 to either the V winning area 356 or the discharge area 357 . In a state where the distribution member 358 is not driven by the driving section 359 for distribution, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 357, and the distribution member 358 is driven by the driving section 359. In this state, game balls that have reached the branch position flow into the V winning area 356 .

A detection sensor 361 for counting is provided in the upstream area 355 of the guide passage 354 so that the detection area exists at a position through which game balls that have flowed into the upstream area 355 always pass. When the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 361 for counting, the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the winning to the second variable prize winning device 32B is executed. In addition, a detection sensor 362 for V winning is provided in the V winning area 356 so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the V winning area 356 always passes. When the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 362 for V winning, a V jackpot is generated. Details of the V jackpot will be described later.

Further, in the discharge area 357, a detection sensor 363 for discharge is provided so that the detection area exists at a position through which the game ball that has flowed into the discharge area 357 must pass. Based on the detection results from the detection sensor 363 for discharge and the detection sensor 362 for V winning, whether or not game balls remain in the second variable winning device 32B, and the number of winnings to the second variable winning device 32A and the number of discharged from the winning device 32A are matched.

The drive unit 359 is periodically driven and controlled from a predetermined timing. Specifically, the drive unit 359 for the distribution member is driven and controlled at a predetermined cycle from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode at which the second variable winning device 32B is opened. As a result, the timing at which the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B is distributed to the V winning area 356 side and the timing at which it is distributed to the ejection area 357 side are periodically switched.

The open/close execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened includes a plurality of open/close execution modes with different periods in which the open/close door 352 is in the open state. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, by varying the period in which the opening/closing door 352 is in the open state, the probability that the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning area 356 is relatively high or low. It is Hereinafter, the opening mode with a high probability of being allocated to the V winning area 356 is referred to as a high distribution mode (high expectation mode), and the opening mode with a low probability is referred to as a low distribution mode (low expectation mode). It says.

In addition, the total probability of the game ball passing through the V winning area 356 in the opening and closing execution mode of the low distribution mode and the opening and closing execution mode of the high distribution mode in which the game ball can win the second variable winning device 32B. is set to be less than a predetermined probability (1/10). In other words, even though the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 is increased in the opening/closing execution mode of the high allocation mode, when combined with the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low allocation mode, , the winning rate to the second variable winning device 32B, the passing rate of the V winning area 356, and the second variable winning device 32B in the opening and closing execution modes of the high allocation mode and the low allocation mode so that the probability is equal to or less than the predetermined probability When the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the allocation ratio between the high allocation mode and the low allocation mode is set.

It is preferable that the second variable winning device 32B is formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 to which of the V winning area 356 and the discharge area 357 the winning game ball is distributed. It is preferable that the front side of the second variable winning device 32B is formed transparently or colorlessly.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32A is a variable winning device that is opened and closed when the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game state) corresponding to the big win is executed. The jackpot game state is a mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot game state, the opening time of the first variable prize winning device 32A reaches a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the first variable prize wins. The first variable prize winning device 32A is repeatedly opened with a plurality of rounds as the upper limit, with a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls winning in the device 32A (first big prize winning port 321) as one round. there is

On the other hand, the second variable winning device 32B is a variable winning device that is opened and closed when the opening/closing execution mode (small winning game state) corresponding to the small winning (special winning or special loss) is executed. The small winning game state is a mode to be shifted to when a small winning is won, and in the small winning game state, the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 sec). Alternatively, the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls in the second variable winning device 32B (second big winning port 351) is defined as one round, and the round game is executed only once. .

In the round game in the jackpot game state and the small win game state, even if the end condition of the upper limit opening time and the upper limit winning number is not satisfied, the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32A of the predetermined number of times and period It is configured to end when the winning device 32B is opened.

When a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, an internal lottery (lottery for whether or not a big win is won, lottery for whether or not a small win is won) is performed. Then, when winning the lottery, the game shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which a prize can be won in the first variable prize winning device 32A or the second variable prize winning device 32B.

As shown in FIG. 4, the special figure display portion 43 and the normal figure display portion 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further faces the window panel 62. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. As a result, game balls are prevented from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.例文帳に追加

In order to clearly indicate the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the special figure display unit 43 enters the opening/closing execution mode by winning the jackpot in the internal lottery (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). is provided with a round display portion RS. In the round display section RS, display of the number of round games is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and the display is finished when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

In addition, the special figure display unit 43 includes the first special figure display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first operation opening 33, and the second operation opening 34 A second special figure display part BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning prize.

In the first special figure display unit AS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the first working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the first working port 33 The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first operation port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed in the first special figure display unit AS After the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the second special figure display part BS, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning to the second working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, it was performed based on the winning to the second working port 34 The results of the internal lottery are clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operation port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed in the second special figure display part BS After the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing execution mode is entered.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the first operating port 33 and the pattern that is variably displayed upon winning the second operating port 34, the former will be referred to as the first special symbol. Or it may be called the first special pattern, and the latter may be called the second special pattern or the second special pattern.

Here, based on winning a prize to one of the operation ports 33, 34, the corresponding first special figure display unit AS, second special figure display unit BS start the variable display, stop display of the predetermined stop result The time until the stop display ends corresponds to one game cycle. A supplementary description of the game round will be given with reference to FIG. 4(b).

The game cycle in the display part 43 for the special figure starts the variable display of the pattern based on the result of the lottery, and then confirms and displays the variably displayed pattern in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery. One time. In other words, the game round consists of the variable display of the pattern and the fixed display of the variable display of the pattern. Note that the term "fixed" is based on the fact that the stop display is performed to display a fixed stop result with the display content (picture) unchanged.

Here, the fixed display of the pattern is not completed when the variable display ends, but is completed when the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery is continuously displayed for a predetermined fixed display time. This is for clarifying the boundary with the subsequent game round while securing the time for the player to recognize the game result. Therefore, the next game round (variable display) is started after the variable display of the pattern is started, after the fixed display time has passed after the variable display time has passed. In the following, the total period of the variable display time and the fixed display time, that is, the period from the start of the variable display of the pattern in the current game round to the start of the variable display of the pattern in the next game round is the game round. It is sometimes called the execution period of

The display part 44 for normal figure is a display part for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 . In this case, in the display unit 44 for the normal pattern, the winning of the through gate 35 triggers the variable display of the pattern, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is performed. The result of is specified by the display.

It should be noted that, in the normal game round, similarly to the special game round shown in FIG. It is one time to perform the final display in a mode corresponding to the result of the winning lottery. In other words, the normal game cycle also consists of the variable display of the pattern and the fixed display of the pattern.

If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize winning to the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state that opens the universal electrical accessory 34a, the display unit 44 for the universal diagram gives a predetermined stop result. is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the opening/closing game is started. In the accessory opening/closing game, the general electric accessory 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state, and then the opening/closing control (switching control) to the closed state is executed at least once. In the accessory opening/closing game, when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 6 sec) after shifting to the game, or when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls wins the second operation opening 34 is configured to end at Note that the accessory opening/closing game is terminated when the general electrical accessory 34a is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a period of time, even if the upper limit opening time and the upper limit winning number end conditions are not satisfied. is configured to

The special-figure display unit 43 and the general-figure display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but are not limited to this, and may be displayed using other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device. good too.

Next, the variable display unit 36 will be explained. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a pattern display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a pattern, which is one type of pattern.

The pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the pattern display device 41, for example, patterns are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by being scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 . That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 43, the variable display is also performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, when shifting to a jackpot game state in which the first big prize winning port 321 of the first variable prize winning device 32A is opened, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset activated line. appears stopped.

Further, on the symbol display device 41, a hold display corresponding to the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is performed. The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the number of entering the second operating port 34 is reserved up to four. In the holding display, a predetermined holding image is displayed, and the number of holdings of the operation openings 33 and 34 is indicated by the number of displayed images. It should be noted that the number of pending items is not limited to that indicated by the above-described pending image, and may be indicated by numerical display. In addition, it is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be a configuration indicated by, for example, a display section or a light emitting section (holding lamp section) provided on the game board 24. FIG.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is provided with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that governs the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power supply, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a board box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83 . Since the box coupling portions 85 are inseparably connected, the circuit board box 83 needs to be destroyed or partly excised when the internal space of the circuit board box 83 is opened. A plurality of box joint portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the joint processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as it is configured to couple the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened. It is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The connection processing by the box connection unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the connection, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening should occur. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85 . When the board box 83 is to be opened, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 are separated from each other. and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the connection process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box connection portion 85 . If a history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 83 has been illegally opened.

A plurality of connecting pieces 86 are provided on one of the short sides of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These connecting pieces 86 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of connecting pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81. A join process is performed between

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the circuit board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving a trace. Furthermore, an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the sealing sticker, and when the sealing sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response wave is removed. A configuration in which wave transmission is disabled may be adopted.

The performance control device 82 is provided with a performance control board that controls a display control device (not shown) as well as voice and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 81. The performance control board is a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 and configured.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91 to which a payout mechanism 92, a discharge passage board 88 and a control device collection unit 93 are attached. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism part 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover part 94, and includes a tank 95 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and the game balls stored in the tank 95. and a payout device 96 for putting out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 96 . The payout mechanism 92 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the side of the rotation shaft of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when game balls are insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a game is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body 12 of the game machine is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Through these output terminals, signals relating to the state of the frame side are output to the management control device on the game hall side. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is unnecessary in a so-called cash machine.

The discharge passage board 88 has a rearwardly open discharge passage formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 93 , and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 93 . Game balls that have won prizes in various prize-winning ports 31, 33, 34, 321, and 351 and game balls that have entered the out port 37 are led out to the discharge passage on the back side of the game board 24. FIG. The discharge passage is formed to discharge the game balls to the island facilities of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led out to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 93 has a horizontally elongated mount, on which a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98 are mounted. The payout control device 97 and the power supply and firing control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other in such a manner that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10 .

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, the board box of the payout control device 97 may be subjected to fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main controller 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box. The launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the shooting handle 60 is controlled. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, so that even in the event of a power failure, the state at the time of the power failure can be retained and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power failure is restored. It's like

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and they may be individually integrated into chips. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than main control device 81 .

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 112 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 115 provided in the main controller 81 and a payout controller 97 . In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115 , and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115 .

Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112 . Various sensors include general winning opening 31, first working opening 33, second working opening 34, through gate 35, first variable winning device 32A, second variable winning device 32B. Sensor 31a, first working opening winning sensor 33a, second working opening winning sensor 34c, through winning winning sensor 35a, first big winning opening detection sensor 325, detection sensor 361, V winning area 356, ejection Detecting sensors 362, 363 and the like for detecting the inflow of game balls into the area 357 are provided. In the MPU 112, based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361 to 363, winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry section is performed. In addition, the MPU 112 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operation opening 33, the second operation opening 34, and the through gate 35. FIG.

An output side of the MPU 112 is connected with a power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, an effect control device 82, and the like. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, based on the winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding ball entry portion corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82 . Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

Further, to the output side of the MPU 112, as various drive units, an electric accessary product drive unit 34b and drive units 323, 353 and 359 for variable winning devices are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot gaming state or small winning gaming state) occurs, the opening and closing door 322 of the first variable winning device 32A and the opening and closing door 352 of the second variable winning device 32B, the distribution member Drive control of drive units 323, 353, and 359 is executed in MPU 112 so that 358 is driven. Further, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. In addition, at each special figure game round, display control of the first special figure display unit AS or the second special figure display unit BS in the special figure display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112, and at the time of the jackpot game Display control of the round display portion RS in the display portion 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is indicated, the MPU 112 performs display control of the general map display unit 44. FIG.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112. Through this external output terminal 99, information on ball entry to various ball entry sections and jackpot information is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information related to the lottery result such as is output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped by the hall computer HC.

The blackout monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power and launch control 98 and also monitors the output of the power and launch control 98 at a stable 24 volt DC voltage. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81 .

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Power for storing data is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81 .

Further, the power supply and shooting control device 98 is responsible for shooting control of the game ball shooting mechanism 53, and the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54 toward the guide rail 54, and the game ball is fired by supplying a drive signal from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the solenoid fired.

The performance control device 82 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. be.

An MPU 242 is mounted on a performance control board 241 provided in the performance control device 82 . The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are incorporated.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command is received. It also receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as variation commands, type commands, and variation end commands. It also receives open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as an opening command, a closing command, an opening command, and an ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81 . The received command is stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 . Then, processing such as analysis of the stored command is performed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas. It is possible to do

The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212 is also connected.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which an MPU 272 in which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are integrated, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277 are mounted. there is

The MPU 272 receives, from the effect control device 82, a pending display control command (holding display control information) for holding display control, a game round control command (game round control information) for performing variable display of symbols, It receives an opening/closing execution mode command (opening/closing execution mode information) for displaying moving images during the opening/closing execution mode. Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, to generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 272 executes various programs. These work data and flags are stored in each area of the work RAM 274 .

The VDP 275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . Since the VDP 275 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 272 and the video RAM 277 to intervene in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 276 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 276 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 276 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 276 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 .

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 277, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 9(a) to (j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 is set with three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display screen G, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen G is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols. It is designed to be

Five effective lines are set on the display screen G, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a result of the big win.

Here, the variable display of each symbol row will be supplementarily explained with reference to FIG. When the game cycle is started, high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which pattern row is being variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display so that the player can recognize the variable-displayed symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 11(b), the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is completed, and the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed, there is provided a stop display period in which the stop display is maintained and waited for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, the symbols in the final stop row (the middle symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment) are not suddenly stopped, but are slowly displayed while reducing the variable display speed. It is common to stop at In this case, if the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are started to be stopped in accordance with the start of the confirmation display on the special symbol display unit 43, the symbols will be slowed down to the extent that it takes time to stop the symbols. The time during which the vehicle is stopped is shortened, resulting in a substantial shortening of the stop display time.

Therefore, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 including the last stop column are stopped (temporarily stopped) before the start of the fixed display on the special figure display unit 43, and then the fixed display on the special figure display unit 43. In accordance with the start timing of , the temporarily stopped symbols are finally stopped (determined display). The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates, or at least a part of characters such as octopuses (see FIG. 6) constituting the main symbols and sub-symbols move. In other words, the temporary stop is performed so as to maintain an imperfect stop state (stop display), although the pattern appears to be stopped at first glance. On the other hand, the confirmation display is performed in such a manner that the reciprocating fine movement and the character movement are not performed, and the state is completely stopped.

The temporary stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started with the result of the winning lottery or the stop result corresponding to the type of jackpot, and then shifts to the confirmation display as it is, or the stop not corresponding to the result of the winning lottery or the type of jackpot. After the result is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changed again, and the stopped result is changed according to the result of the lottery, etc., and then the display may shift to the final display.

By the way, in the special figure game cycle executed by the special figure display unit 43, the pattern is not temporarily stopped and displayed, and the variably displayed pattern is suddenly stopped according to the lapse of the variable display time, and the state (pattern is stopped) is maintained until the fixed display time elapses. In other words, the stop display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 43 becomes the fixed display as it is. This is the same for the normal game cycle executed by the normal map display unit 44 .

The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the one described above, and may be arbitrarily selected. Combinations of symbols corresponding to big hits and misses can be changed as appropriate.

In the lower left part of the display screen G, a first reserved display area Ga is set, and in the lower right part of the display screen G, a second reserved display area Gb is set.

In the first reservation display area (non-priority side reservation display area) Ga, the same number of unit reservation display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. It is divided and displayed so that it is displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operation port 33, the maximum number of reservations is four, and correspondingly, the first unit reservation display area Ga1, the first A two-unit reserved display area Ga2, a third unit reserved display area Ga3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 is one, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball is the first operation. When the number of pending winnings in the mouth 33 is four, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Ga1 to the fourth unit pending display area Ga4.

In addition, the second reservation display area (priority side reservation display area) Gb has the same number of unit reservation display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of reservations when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34. It is divided and displayed so that it is set up. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operation port 34, the maximum number of reservations is four. A two-unit reserved display area Gb2, a third unit reserved display area Gb3, and a fourth unit reserved display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of reservations when the game ball wins the second operation opening 34 is 1, the image for reservation is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball is displayed in the second operation opening 34 When the number of pending prizes is 4, the pending images are displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Gb1 to the fourth unit pending display area Gb4.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lotteries in MPU 112 of Main Control Unit 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various counter information to set the jackpot generation lottery, the setting of the display of the special figure display unit 43, the setting of the performance contents of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, a big hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the occurrence of the big hit, a big hit type counter C2 used when judging the big hit type, and a small hit type A small hit type counter C3 used for , a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time in the special figure display unit 43 and the pattern display device 41 and are used. In addition, an open random number counter C4 is used for lottery to determine whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is to be in the electric open state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114 . In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3, and the variation type counter CS indicates that the winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 has occurred. In this case, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as information storage means.

The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a first special figure display portion reserved area Ra and a second special figure display portion reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb each have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. Each numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information. Note that the pending information corresponds to special information (determination information).

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of the fourth area. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are reserved and stored. In addition, a reservation number storage area is provided in the reservation ball storage area 114b, and in the reservation number storage area, the number of holding and storing the winning history of the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 is specified. Information for doing is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 43. Based on the various numerical information stored in the area AE, determination of success or failure is performed.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section.

The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored as a success/failure table (a success/failure information group) in a success/failure table storage area 113a as success/failure information group storage means in the ROM 113 . Here, the contents of the success/failure table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the first special figure (FIG. 13(a)) and a success/failure table for the second special figure (FIG. 13(b)) are provided. In the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the win/loss table for the first special figure is referred, and in the lottery based on the entering ball into the second operating port 34, the win/fail table for the second special figure is referred. be done.

In the success/failure table for the first special figure, as shown in FIG. 13(a), the value of the random number corresponding to the jackpot result is one "7". That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 ranging from "0" to "199", "7" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/200. In addition, in the success/failure table for the first special figure, four of "0" to "3" correspond to small winning results, and the probability of small winning results is 1/20. It should be noted that, except for the value of the random number that results in the big win and the value of the random number that results in the small win, the lottery result is configured to result in a loss.

In the success/failure table for the second special figure, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the value of the random number corresponding to the jackpot result is one "7". That is, among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 of "0 to 199", "7" corresponds to the jackpot result, and the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/200. In the success/failure table for the second special figure, 20 of "0" to "6" and "8" to "20" correspond to the small hit result, and the probability of the small hit result is 1/10. ing. It should be noted that, except for the value of the random number that results in the big win and the value of the random number that results in the small win, the lottery result is configured to result in a loss.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for allocating the jackpot type when the jackpot hits, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It's becoming The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table (first distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113 . Here, the contents of the jackpot type table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special figure (FIG. 14(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special figure (FIG. 14(b)) are provided. In the case of a big hit based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the jackpot type table for the first special figure is referred to, and when the big win is achieved based on the ball entering the second operating port 34. The jackpot type table for the second special figure is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure, "0" to "49" correspond to the 5R jackpot result A, and "50" to "99" correspond to the 5R jackpot result. corresponds to B. That is, in the present embodiment, both the probability of being assigned to the 5R jackpot result A and the probability of being assigned to the 5R jackpot result B are set to 50%. When the 5R jackpot result A or the 5R jackpot result B is obtained, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which round games for five rounds are executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened five times.

Further, when the 5R jackpot result A is won, the high frequency support mode is entered after the jackpot game state is finished. The high frequency support mode in this case continues until the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 9 times) after the transition to the support mode, and after the high frequency support mode ends, the support mode continues. Move to infrequent support mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution count of the special figure game times in the high-frequency support mode is configured to count only the second special figure game times. Therefore, after the transition to the high-frequency support mode, regardless of the number of executions of the first special game, when the number of executions of the second special game reaches the end reference number of times, high-frequency support mode ends.

On the other hand, when the 5R jackpot result B is won, the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode without shifting to the high-frequency support mode after the jackpot game state ends. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when a big win is achieved based on the ball entering the first operating hole 33, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the big win game state ends with a probability of 50%. Become. In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state means a state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

As the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared with the situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the second operating port 34 A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of occurrence of winnings is relatively high and low. Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the latter has a higher probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role item open lottery using the open random number counter C4 than the former. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric role 34a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one open time is set. set long.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured such that the probability of being elected in the electric role open state election in (general figure success or failure lottery) is the same. Further, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by changing any one condition or any combination of the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special figure, "0" to "99" correspond to the 15R jackpot result. That is, when a big hit is achieved based on the ball entering the second operating port 34, it is set to be distributed to a 15R big win result with a probability of 100%. When a 15R jackpot result is obtained, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which 15 rounds worth of round games are executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened 15 times. In addition, when a 15R jackpot result is obtained, the game shifts to a high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode in this case also continues until the number of games reaches the end standard number of times (specifically 9 times) after the transition to the support mode, as in the case of the jackpot type table for the first special figure. It has become.

The small hit type counter C3 is for distributing the type when it becomes a small hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It is configured. The small hit type counter C3 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening . More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section.

The distribution destination of the game result for the small hit type counter C3 is stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 113 as a small hit type table (second distribution information group). Here, the contents of the small hit type table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As the small hit type table, a small hit type table for the first special figure (Fig. 15(a)) and a small hit type table for the second special figure (Fig. 15(b)) are provided. When the small hit is achieved based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the small winning type table for the first special figure is referred to, and the small winning is achieved based on the ball entering the second operating port 34. In the case of the second special figure, the jackpot type table is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), in the small hit type table for the first special figure, "0" to "99" correspond to the disadvantageous small hit results. That is, when winning a small win based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, it is set to be distributed to a disadvantageous small win result with a probability of 100%. The disadvantageous small winning result is one kind of the small winning result, and when it becomes a disadvantageous small winning result, a small winning game (opening/closing execution mode of one round) is executed by the second variable winning device 32B. Specifically, the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B is controlled in a low distribution mode in which the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 32B is less likely to be distributed to the V winning area 356.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), in the small hit type table for the second special figure, "0" to "59" correspond to the advantageous small hit result A, and "60" to "99" are advantageous small hits. Corresponds to result B. That is, when a small win is won based on the ball entering the second operating port 34, it is distributed to the advantageous small prize result A with a probability of 60%, and is distributed to the advantageous small prize result B with a probability of 40%. Advantageous small winning result A and advantageous small winning result B are types of small winning results, and when these small winning results occur, a small winning game is executed by the second variable winning device 32B. More specifically, the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B is controlled in a highly distributed mode in which the game balls that enter the second variable winning device 32B are easily distributed to the V winning area 356.

Here, the low allocation mode and the high allocation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . Incidentally, since the operation of the distribution member 358 (see FIG. 7) is the same in both the low distribution mode and the high distribution mode, the operation of the distribution member 358 will be described first.

As shown in FIG. 16(a3), at timing t1, which is the start timing of the small winning game, the distribution member 358 distributes the game balls that have won the second variable prize winning device 32B to the discharge area 357 (outside). located in position. Then, at timing t4 after the waiting time of 1 sec has elapsed from timing t1, the distribution member 358 is displaced to a position to distribute the winning game ball to the V winning area 356. Thereafter, this state is maintained until the distribution time of 2 seconds has elapsed from timing t4, and at timing t5 after the distribution time has elapsed, the position is returned to the position on the outside side.

In this case, in the small winning game of the low allocation mode executed based on the disadvantageous small winning result, as shown in FIG. 16 (a2), 0.5 sec is set as the opening period of the small winning game ( Timing t2), after the opening period has elapsed, the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened for 0.1 sec (timing t3). That is, in the small winning game of the low allocation mode, the opening time (0.1 sec) of the second variable winning device 32B is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), and is extremely short. Even if the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, it is difficult for the game balls to win (the winning is almost impossible). Even if the game ball wins, since the opening to closing of the second variable winning device 32B is completed within the timing t1 to t4 when the distribution member 358 is positioned on the discharge area 357 side, the winning game The balls are distributed to areas 357 for ejection. That is, as shown in FIGS. 16(a2) and (a3), the period during which the distribution member 358 is positioned on the V winning area 356 side does not overlap with the period during which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state. Because of this relationship, the game ball cannot pass through the V winning area 356 .

On the other hand, in the high allocation mode small winning game executed based on the advantageous small winning result, as shown in FIG. ), and after the opening period has passed, the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened for 1.8 seconds (timing t13). Therefore, in the small winning game of the high distribution mode, as shown in FIGS. 16(b2) and (b3), the distribution member 358 is in the discharge area at timing t13 when the second variable winning device 32B is being opened. It is displaced from the 357 side to the V winning area 356 side. As a result, the period during which the distribution member 358 is positioned on the V winning area 356 side overlaps with the period during which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, and the period is 1.3 sec. Since the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec, approximately two game balls can be won in the second variable prize winning device 32B during this period, so one or more game balls are almost certainly for V winning. The area 356 can be passed through.

In addition, in the small winning game of the high distribution mode, the period (0.5 sec ) is a period shorter than the product of the shooting period of the game ball and the upper limit winning number (10) of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, before the distribution member 358 is displaced to the V winning area 356 side after the second variable winning device 32B is opened, the winning number of game balls to the second variable winning device 32B is the upper limit winning. It is avoided that the number is reached and the small winning game ends (the small winning game ends without being distributed to the V winning area 356).

Here, in both the advantageous small winning result A and the advantageous small winning result B, the mode of opening and closing control of the second variable winning device 32B during the winning game is the same, but it is the advantageous small winning result. The distribution result of the small hit type in the case affects the distribution result of the big hit type when the V jackpot occurs. That is, when the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B in the small winning game flows into the V winning area 356 and the V winning occurs, depending on the type of the small winning game being executed at that time, V jackpot types are distributed. This distribution is performed using a V jackpot type table (third distribution information group) stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 113 .

As shown in FIG. 15(c), in the V jackpot type table, 16RV jackpot results and 6RV jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results. The former has 16 round games and the latter has 6 round games. That is, the 16RV jackpot result and the 6RV jackpot result differ in terms of the number of round games performed in the jackpot game state, that is, the expected number of winning balls. Further, in both of these V jackpot results, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the jackpot game state ends, and the end reference number of times is 9 in both cases. That is, when a small winning game is generated based on the second special figure entering ball, and a V prize is generated in the small winning game, the support mode after the end of the big winning game state is high frequency with a probability of 100%. It is supposed to move to support mode.

In the jackpot type table for the V jackpot, the type of the V winning flag and the type of the V jackpot result, which will be described later, are associated with each other. As will be described in detail later, the type of the V winning flag corresponds to the type of the advantageous small winning result that triggered the V big winning. As a result, the type of the V jackpot result is determined by the type of the advantageous small hit result that triggered the V jackpot. Specifically, if the small winning game being executed when the V winning occurs is based on the fact that the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure is the advantageous small winning result A, the 16 RV big winning If the small winning game that is distributed to the result and executed when the V prize is generated is based on the advantageous small winning result B, it is distributed to the 6RV big winning result. Therefore, the probability of allocation to the 16RV jackpot result is 60%, which is the same as the probability of the advantageous small win result A among the advantageous small win results, and the distribution probability to the 6RV jackpot result is the same as the advantageous small win result B. 40%, which is the same as the probability that

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning lottery of the second special figure includes the advantageous small winning result, and it is possible to expect the acquisition of the V jackpot, and furthermore, the shift to the high frequency support mode The probability of doing so is also higher in the second special figure than in the first special figure. In other words, the winning lottery for the second special symbol is treated more preferentially than that for the first special symbol, and the second operating opening 34 is more advantageous for the player than the first operating opening 33. - 特許庁Therefore, the player plays the game in anticipation of winning a prize to the second operation opening 34 .

In the MPU 112, using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, the values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the small hit type counter C3, the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS A stop result is determined, and the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113 is used for the determination.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is the variation display time and fixed display time in the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS of the special figure display unit 43, the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41, is used in determining in the MPU 112 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. More specifically, it is stored in the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operation port 33, and the second value in the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operation port 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the special figure display section.

In the MPU 112, using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE, the variation display time in the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is determined. A variable display time table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is used.

The open random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electrical work holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

The value of the random number that becomes a normal pattern hit (release result) is stored in the success/prohibition table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 as a normal pattern success/failure table. Here, the contents of the success/failure table for normal maps will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 17 . As the pass/fail table for the normal figure, a table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 17(a)) and a table for the high frequency support mode (FIG. 17(b)) are provided. If the general figure game round is executed under the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the general figure for propriety table for the low frequency support mode is referred to, and the general figure game under the situation of the high frequency support mode When the round is executed, the general map propriety table for the high-frequency support mode is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), in the low-frequency support mode normal figure right/wrong table, the value of the random number corresponding to the opening result is one "7". In other words, the probability of hitting the general pattern is 1/200, and under the low frequency support mode, most of the general pattern success or failure lottery is set to result in a loss. It should be noted that, except for the value of the random number that becomes the opening result, it is configured so that the lottery result is a lost result (result that the general electrical accessory 34a is not opened).

Then, when the result of the general figure success or failure lottery is an open result under the low frequency support mode, the opening and closing game of the general electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening and closing mode for the low frequency support mode. Here, the accessory opening/closing game for the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 18(a).

In the accessory opening/closing game for the low-frequency support mode, opening/closing control of the general electric accessory 34a is performed once from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game. The opening time in this case is set to 0.2 sec. Since this open time is shorter than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec) and is extremely short, it is difficult to win a prize even if the general electrical role 34a is in an open state (a prize is almost impossible to expect). It is a thing. Therefore, under the low-frequency support mode, even if the result of the general figure success or failure lottery is an open result, almost no winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, and the success or failure lottery of the second special figure is substantially are not accepted.

In addition, the aspect of the accessory opening and closing game for the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above. It may be performed a plurality of times, or the opening time may be set to a time other than 0.2 sec.

Also, for the sake of convenience, 0.2 sec is set for the opening period and the ending period, but this is also arbitrary, and both periods may be different from 0.2 sec. For example, they may be set to 0 sec.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the normal figure right/wrong table for the high-frequency support mode, there are 190 random number values from "0" to "189" corresponding to the release result. That is, the probability of becoming an open result is 190/200, and under the high-frequency support mode, most of the normal drawing success or failure lotteries are set to become an open result. The lottery result is configured to be a loss result, except for the random number value that is the result of opening.

Then, when the result of the general figure success/failure lottery is an open result under the high frequency support mode, the opening and closing game of the general electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening and closing mode for the high frequency support mode. Here, the accessory opening/closing game for the high-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 18(b).

The accessory opening/closing game for the high-frequency support mode is composed of a combination of a first opening/closing pattern and a second opening/closing pattern. More specifically, after executing the first opening/closing pattern, the second opening/closing pattern is executed. configured to run.

Compared to the second opening/closing pattern, the first opening/closing pattern makes it easier for the ball to enter the second operating port 34. In other words, under the high-frequency support mode, the second special figure is retained. It is easy to store, and it is easy to receive the payout of prize balls based on the entry into the second operation port 34. - 特許庁

On the other hand, in the second opening/closing pattern, a ball is less likely to enter the second operating opening 34 than in the first opening/closing pattern, but an invalid ball (untargeted ball) is less likely to occur than in the first opening/closing pattern. It is easy to efficiently generate the pending storage of the second special figure. In this pachinko machine 10, even if a ball of the second special pattern occurs while the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern has reached the upper limit number, the reservation information based on the ball of the second special pattern (jackpot random number counter C1, etc.) is not stored in the held ball storage area 114b, and an invalid entered ball is a entered ball for which such held information is not stored. However, even if the ball is invalid, the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering the second operating port 34 is performed.

Specifically, each opening/closing pattern will be described. It is 3 sec, which is more than the product (2.4 sec) of the upper limit winning number (4) to the second operation opening 34, which is one of the end conditions of the object opening/closing game. Therefore, when the game balls are shot in the normal mode (the mode in which the shooting handle 60 continues to rotate), the winning number of game balls to the second operation opening 34 in the middle of the first opening/closing pattern is the upper limit. When the number of winning prizes is reached, the accessory opening/closing game ends.

In addition, the opening time of the general electric role 34a in the first opening and closing pattern is more than the product (2.4 sec) of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved memories of the second special figure. It's becoming Therefore, by controlling the opening and closing of the general electric accessory 34a in the first opening and closing pattern, it is possible to generate a number of ball entries corresponding to at least the upper limit of the number of reserved memories to the second operation opening 34. .

On the other hand, in the second opening/closing pattern, the opening/closing control of the universal electrical accessory 34a is performed three times, and the opening time of each opening is set to 1 sec, which is longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, at least one ball can be expected to enter the second operation opening 34 each time the opening/closing control of the universal electrical accessory 34a is performed once in the second opening/closing pattern. In the second opening and closing pattern, the waiting time between each opening (the period of waiting for the next opening with the general electric accessory 34a in the closed state) is set according to the execution period of the second special figure game round there is The relationship between each waiting time and the execution period of the game round of the second special figure will be described in detail later.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 to advance the game will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 112 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361 to 363 are read, and the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361 to 363 are determined and detected. Perform an action that saves information. In addition, when the winning of the game ball is detected by various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, to instruct the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the prize ball command for For example, when the winning to the first variable winning device 32A is detected by the first big winning hole detection sensor 325, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls set. In subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the following step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3 and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114. FIG.

In the subsequent step S104, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. In the prize-winning process for through, if a prize has been won to the through-gate 35, the number of stored role-things stored in the power reserve area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). Under this condition, the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electrician holding area 114c. In addition, the production control device 82 executes a process for lighting the third pending light-emitting portion 47 corresponding to the number of stored character product pending storage.

In the subsequent step S105, a prize winning process for the operation opening is executed. Here, the prize winning process for the working opening will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. 20 .

In step S201 of the operation opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first operation opening 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the first operation opening winning sensor 33a. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. In the following step S203, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension storage number RaN stored in the suspension ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (0 or not). 1 is added to the first start holding storage number RaN when holding information is stored in the holding area Ra for the first special figure display unit based on the winning to the first operation port 33, and the game of the first special figure 1 is subtracted when a turn starts.

If it is less than the maximum number, ie, 0, then in step S204, a process of adding 1 to the first start pending storage number RaN is executed. After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS in the first special figure display section reservation area Ra. In the subsequent step S206, the setting processing of the first pending command is executed. In this process, information that the winning to the first operation port 33 has occurred is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the game about the reservation information acquired based on the winning to the first operation port 33 this time A process of outputting information on times (information on game results, information on variable display time, etc.) to the effect control device 82 side is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the upper limit number (four pieces) of reservation information is stored in the first special figure display unit reservation area Ra, even if the winning to the first operation port 33 occurs Since the reservation information is not acquired, the output of the first reservation command is not performed even if the winning to the first operation port 33 occurs in this situation. This also applies to the second pending command, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in either step S201 or step S203, or if the process of step S206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S207. In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second operation opening 34 (start winning) based on the detection state of the second operation opening winning sensor 34c. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operation port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out one game ball is set in step S208. In the subsequent step S209, it is determined whether or not the second start pending memory number RbN stored in the pending ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (0 or not). 1 is added to the second start pending storage number RbN when the pending information is stored in the second special figure display unit holding area Rb based on the winning to the second operation port 34, and the second special figure game 1 is subtracted when a turn starts.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, if it is 0, in step S210, a process of adding 1 to the second start pending storage number RbN is executed. After that, in step S211, an information acquisition process is performed to store each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS in the second special figure display section reservation area Rb. In the subsequent step S212, a process of setting a second pending command is executed. In this process, information that the winning to the second operation port 34 has occurred is output to the effect control device 82 side, and the game about the reservation information acquired based on the winning to the second operation port 34 this time A process of outputting information on times (information on game results, information on variable display time, etc.) to the effect control device 82 side is performed. When a negative determination is made in either step S207 or step S209, or after the process of step S212 is executed, the prize winning process for this working opening ends.

Incidentally, the prize ball commands set in the above steps S202 and S208 are transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output processing of the normal processing described later. In addition, the hold command set in step S206 and step S212 is also transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. These pending commands contain information as to which of the winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is based on the winning of the operating port, and in the effect control device 82 the suspension By receiving the command, the display control device 212 changes the display by each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 side, and the first special figure display area GA and the second special figure display area GB in the display screen G Make display settings.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt processing in FIG. End this timer interrupt processing. The V winning process will be described in detail later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing of steps S301 to S308 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S311 and S312 is executed during the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, an external signal output processing is executed in step S301. In the external signal output process of step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97 . Moreover, when the command for production|presentation is set, it is transmitted with respect to the production|presentation control apparatus 82. - 特許庁

Next, in step S302, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114 .

In the following step S303, a special figure game round control process for advancing the game of each special figure game round is executed. In this special figure game round control process, along with determining the success or failure of the big hit, etc., the allocation determination of the big hit type, and the allocation determination of the small hit type, the setting of the fluctuation display of the symbol by the symbol display device 41, the display unit for the special figure 43, etc. are set.

After performing the special figure game round control process of step S303, it progresses to step S304 and performs the transition process to the small hit game state for shifting a game state to a small hit game state. In the subsequent step S305, a transition process to the big winning game state is executed to shift the game state to the big winning game state.

Next, in step S306, an electric support process for driving and controlling the universal electric accessory 34a provided in the second operation port 34 is executed. In subsequent step S307, a V allocation setting process for driving and controlling the allocation member 358 provided in the second variable winning device 32B is executed.

In addition, the special figure game round control process of step S303, the transition process to the small hit game state of step S304, the transition process to the big hit game state of step S305, the electric support process of step S306 and the V distribution of step S307 Details of the setting process will be described later.

After executing the V allocation setting process of step S307, game ball launch control process is executed in step S308. In the game ball shooting control process, the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 53 is energized once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a shooting permission signal is input from the power supply and shooting control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In the subsequent step S309, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 114. The power failure flag is set when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S311, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 . Further, in step S312, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated. The variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S309 that the power failure flag has been set, it means that a power failure has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S313 onwards is executed. That is, in step S313, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S314 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S315 access to the RAM 114 is prohibited. continues in an infinite loop until it can no longer run.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, the special figure game round control processing of step S303 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure game round control process, first, at step S401, it is determined whether or not a big hit game or a small hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various big hit flags and various small hit flags are stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . The jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and is stored when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state in the transition processing to the jackpot game state, which will be described later. Cleared when exiting the state. In addition, the small hit flag is a flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed, and is stored when the game state is shifted to the small hit game state in the transition process to the small hit game state described later. It is erased when ending the small winning game state in the transition process.

When the jackpot game or the small winning game is being executed, the processing after step S402, that is, the processing for starting the game round in steps S404 to S406, the processing for progressing the game round in step S408, and the end of the game round in step S409 This special figure game round control process is ended without executing any of the processes. That is, when the big winning game or the small winning game is being executed, regardless of whether or not winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs, the special figure game round is not started.

When the big winning game or the small winning game is not being executed, at step S402, it is determined whether or not the special figure display unit 43 is performing the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first special figure display portion AS and the second special figure display portion BS is being displayed in a variable manner. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 stores a flag during variable display. The variable display flag is stored when the variable display is started for either the first special figure display portion AS or the second special figure display portion BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When the special figure display unit 43 is not in the process of variable display, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display in the special figure display section 43 has ended. That is, after the variable display ends, the result display is executed for a predetermined period of time, and in this step, it is determined whether or not the fixed display has ended.

When the confirmation display has ended, the process proceeds to the game cycle start processing of steps S404 to S406. In the game turn start processing, first in step S404, whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the starting pending memory numbers of the first special figure display unit AS and the second special figure display unit BS, is "0" judge. When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation memory numbers RaN and RbN for both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are "0". Therefore, the special figure game round control processing is terminated as it is.

When the common reservation number CRN is not "0", the data stored in the first special figure display section reservation area Ra or the second special figure display section reservation area Rb is set for variable display in step S405 Execute the data setting process for doing, and after executing the special figure fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the special figure display unit 43 and the fluctuation display in the symbol display device 41 in step S406, this special figure End the game round control process.

Here, the data setting process of step S405 and the special figure fluctuation start process of step S406 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second start holding storage number RbN held and stored in the second special figure display portion holding area Rb is "0". When the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure display unit of steps S502 to S506 is executed, and when the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0" To execute the data setting process for the second special figure display portion of steps S507 to S512.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN is "0". is stored, the data stored in the second special figure display unit reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more I am trying to Thereby, when the reservation information is stored in both the first special figure display unit reservation area Ra and the second special figure display unit reservation area Rb, the second special figure corresponding to the second operation port 34 The hold information stored in the display hold area Rb is given priority.

In the data setting process for the first special figure display portion, first, in step S502, the first start reservation storage number RaN of the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S503, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S504, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S505, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure display portion reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of first area Ra1, third area Ra3→second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4→third area Ra3.

In the following step S506, set a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted. . In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information that the reservation area that is the target of the shift of this data corresponds to the first special figure display section reservation area Ra, that is, the first operation port 33 To select a special figure shift command including information that corresponds to, the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S506 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display in the first reserved display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number based on the received special figure shift command.

In the data setting process for the second special figure display section, first, in step S507, the second start reservation storage number RbN of the second special figure display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S508, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. After that, in step S509, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second special figure display portion reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S510, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure display portion reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side. Data in each area is shifted in the order of first area Rb1, third area Rb3→second area Rb2, fourth area Rb4→third area Rb3.

In the following step S511, the second special figure flag is set (stored) in the second special figure display section flag storage area (second special figure display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. The second special figure flag is information for specifying that the start of the current fluctuation display is the second special figure display unit BS side fluctuation display, in other words, the second special figure game round is executed This is a flag indicating that it is in progress. The stored second special figure flag is erased when the game round of the second special figure ends.

In the following step S512, a special figure shift command (special figure shift occurrence information) which is information for making the effect control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, recognize that the data in the reservation area has been shifted is set. . In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, the information that the reservation area that is the target of this data shift corresponds to the second special figure display section reservation area Rb, that is, the second operation port 34 A special figure shift command including information of correspondence is selected, and the selected special figure shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.例文帳に追加After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The special figure shift command set in step S512 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). In the production control device 82, based on the received special figure shift command, the display in the second reservation light emitting part 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second reservation display area Gb of the pattern display device 41 are reduced. Execute processing for changing corresponding to.

Next, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114.

If the second special figure flag is not stored, the success or failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the first special figure (see FIG. 13(a)) in step S602, and the second special figure flag is stored. If it is, the success/failure determination is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the second special figure (see FIG. 13(b)) in step S603. After execution of step S602 or step S603, in step S604, it is determined whether or not the result of each of the above determinations is a jackpot result.

If the jackpot is won, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S605. If the second special figure flag is not stored, in step S606, the jackpot category table for the first special figure (see FIG. 14(a)) is referenced to determine the sorting of the jackpot category. On the other hand, when the second special figure flag is stored, in step S607, the jackpot category table for the second special figure (see FIG. 14(b)) is referenced to determine the sorting of the jackpot category.

After execution of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, the setting process of the stop result for big hits according to the distribution result is executed. This processing is to set the stop result for the big hit for the pattern in the display unit 43 for the special figure. When the stop result for jackpot result A is set and the jackpot type is assigned to 5R jackpot result B, the stop result for 5R jackpot result B (stop result different from the stop result for 5R jackpot result A) is set. set. In addition, as a result of the distribution determination in step S607, when the jackpot type is distributed to the 15 jackpot result, the stop result for the 15R jackpot result is set. In this way, the stop result of the pattern in the special figure display unit 43 is set based on the jackpot type distribution result, and substantially corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this sense, the jackpot type counter C2 can be said to be a jackpot pattern counter for drawing lots for the stopping result of the pattern in the special figure display unit 43 .

In addition, it is good also as a structure which selects the stop result of the pattern in the display part 43 for special figures based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Even in this case, the pattern stop result and the jackpot classification result correspond to each other. Further, the pattern stop result may be configured such that one type of stop result corresponds to one jackpot type, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of stop results correspond. Also, the first special figure and the second special figure may be configured to share the stop result, specifically, the stop result for the 15R jackpot result in the second special figure is the 5R jackpot result in the first special figure It may be a configuration that overlaps the stop result for A and the 5R jackpot result B.

After step S608 is executed, in step S609, various jackpot flags are set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 as information for identifying the jackpot type of this time. Specifically, any one of the 5R flag A, the 5R flag B, and the 15R flag is set corresponding to the 5R jackpot result A, the 5R jackpot result B, and the 15R jackpot result, respectively.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S604 (determined that the big hit is not generated), it is determined in step S610 whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in step S602 or step S603 is a small hit result. When it is a small hit result, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S611. When the 2nd special figure flag is not stored, at step S612 the small hit classification table for the 1st special figure (refer to figure 15 (a) reference) it does the distribution decision of small hit kind. On the other hand, if the second special figure flag is stored, the small hit classification table for the second special figure (see FIG. 15(b)) is referred to in step S613 to determine the distribution of the small hit category. .

After execution of step S612 or step S613, in step S14, the setting process of the stop result for small hits according to the distribution result is executed. This step is for setting the stop result for the small hit for the pattern in the special figure display unit 43, and as a result of the distribution determination in step S612, when the small hit type is distributed to the disadvantageous small hit result , sets the stop result for the unfavorable small win result. In addition, when the small winning type is sorted to the advantageous small winning result A in step S613, the stop result for the advantageous small winning result A is set, and when the small winning type is sorted to the advantageous small winning result B , the stop result for the advantageous small winning result B is set.

The number of types of stop results for one small hit type and the point that the stop result may be shared between the first special figure and the second special figure are the same as in the case of the stop result for the big hit.

After execution of step S614, in step S615, various small hit flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 as information for specifying the small hit type of this time. Specifically, any one of the disadvantageous small winning flag, the advantageous small winning A flag, and the advantageous small winning B flag is set as corresponding to the disadvantageous small winning result, the advantageous small winning result A, and the advantageous small winning result B, respectively. .

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S610 (it is determined that the small hit is not generated), in step S616, the stop result corresponding to the off result is set as the stop result in the display unit 43 for the special figure.

After execution of step S609, step S615 or step S616, the process advances to step S617 to determine whether or not the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. The specific state flag is for the MPU 112 to grasp the period during which the game can be played after receiving the winning lottery of the second special figure. After the end of the frequency support mode, it is set over a period in which the number of pending memories of the second special figure is greater than 0.

When it determines with the specific state flag being stored, it progresses to step S618 and adds only 1 to the value of the specific game frequency counter area OC provided in the various counter areas 114d of RAM114. The value (counter value) of the specific number-of-games counter area OC is for the MPU 112 to specify what special figure game round (second special figure game round) in the specific state.

After execution of step S618 or when a negative determination is made in step S617, the process proceeds to step S619, and the special figure fluctuation display time setting process is executed. Here, the setting processing of the special figure fluctuation display time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation display time setting process, first in step S701, whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, that is, whether it is the second special figure fluctuation display judge. When it determines with the 2nd special figure flag being stored, it progresses to step S702 and determines whether the specific state flag is stored in the said various flag storage area 114e.

If it is determined that the specific state flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S703, and it is determined whether or not the result of this lottery is a big win or a small win. This determination is made by determining whether or not various big hit flags (step S609) or various small hit flags (step S615) are stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

When it is determined that the jackpot or small win is won, the fluctuation display time and determination are made by referring to the fluctuation display time table A set as the fluctuation display time table of the second special figure for the jackpot or small win in the specific state. Sort (select) the display time. The variable display time table A for the second special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 26(a).

In the variable display time table A, the variable pattern information (period information) corresponding to the variable display time and the fixed display time is set (stored) in association with the value of the specific game number counter area OC and the value of the variable type counter CS. ). Specifically, after the start of the high-frequency support mode, the 1st to 8th second special game times, the 9th second special game time, which is the final game time in the high-frequency support mode, and the high After the end of the frequency support mode, for the 1st to 8th (10th to 17th after the start of the high frequency support mode) game rounds of the 2nd special figure, the information of the variable display time and the fixed display time is the variable type It is set in association with the value of the counter CS.

For the 1st to 8th second special figure game rounds, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", a variable display time of 15 sec and a fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected. is set to In other words, after the start of the high-frequency support mode, when a big hit or a small hit occurs in the 1st to 8th second special game rounds, the above-mentioned variable display time and fixed display time are selected. there is In this case, the pattern display device 41 is designed to notify a big win or a small win after the ready-to-win display.

To give a supplementary explanation of the reach display (reach state), the reach display (read state) is provided with a pattern display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of patterns (patterns), and opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game state or small win game state). In a gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result (the big win stop result or the small win stop result) in the game round in which the winning game state), the variable display (or It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display result in the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display is started.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, the winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the big winning game state or the small winning game state are displayed. It is a display state in which combinations of ready-to-win symbols that have the possibility of being established are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step prior to ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset effective line within the display screen of the symbol display device 41. To form a ready-to-win line by stop-displaying combinations of possible ready-to-win patterns, and to perform variable display of patterns by a final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win line is formed.

More specifically, a reach line is formed by stop-displaying main symbols having the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 10). Then, when the variation display of the medium symbol row Z2 is switched from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display and a jackpot game state occurs, the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are attached. is stop-displayed on the reach line, and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated. Further, even when a small winning game state occurs in a specific state, the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. The variable display of the symbols in Z2 is terminated.

In addition, in the ready-to-win display, while the combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. It includes those that perform production, and those that perform ready-to-win production by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after displaying a combination of ready-to-win symbols in a reduced size or not. Further, when the ready-to-win display is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, a random number counter for effect may be used to determine whether or not to perform an advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character.

It should be noted that the items "state" and "effect mode" in FIG. 26 indicate under what circumstances the variable display time and fixed display time in FIG. It is added for convenience only to make it easier to understand the relationship with the performance performed by the pattern display device 41, and is not stored as information in the variable display time table.

Also, for the ninth second special figure game round, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the variable display time of 30 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected. is set to In this case, since it is the final game round of the high-frequency support mode that the variable display time longer than the first to eighth rounds is selected, the symbol display device 41 is designed to increase the excitement of the game. This is for executing an effect with a long effect time.

Also, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, for the 1st to 8th second special figure game rounds, when the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the fluctuation display time of 1 sec and 0 It is set to select a fixed display time of 0.5 sec. In other words, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, if a big hit or a small hit occurs in the 1st to 8th second special game rounds, a short fluctuation display time is selected, and the big hit result or the small hit result is It is designed to be notified immediately. Specifically, after starting the variable display of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without executing the ready-to-win display, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the time of the stop display, the main symbols with the same number are arranged on any of the activated lines L1 to L5.

Returning to the description of the setting process of the special figure fluctuation display time in FIG. With reference to the variable display time table B set as the variable display time table of the second special figure, the variable display time and the fixed display time are sorted. The variable display time table B for the second special figure will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b).

Also in the variable display time table B, after the start of the high-frequency support mode, the 1st to 8th second special figure game rounds and the 9th second special figure which is the final game round in the high-frequency support mode and the 1st to 8th game times after the end of the high-frequency support mode (10th to 17th times after the start of the high-frequency support mode), the variation pattern information (variation display time and fixed display time) is set (stored) in association with the value of the variation type counter CS.

For the 1st to 8th second special figure game rounds, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "99", a variable display time of 15 sec and a fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, It is set such that when the variation type counter CS is between "100" and "199", a variation display time of 4 seconds and a fixed display time of 0.5 seconds are selected. When the variable display time of 15 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, similarly to the case of the variable display time table A, the symbol display device 41 notifies a big win or a small win after the ready-to-win display. Further, when the variable display time of 4 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in combination without executing the ready-to-win display on the symbol display device 41 .

For the ninth second special figure game round, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the variable display time of 30 sec and the fixed display time of 2.5 sec are selected. It is The reason why the long fluctuation display time is selected is the same as in the case of the big win or the small win. On the other hand, the fixed display time is set to be longer than the big win or the small win. In order to allow the player to recognize that the high-frequency support mode has ended, a predetermined end effect is made using the period of fixed display of the 9th game round (the final game round of the high-frequency support mode). to execute

After the end of the high frequency support mode, for the 1st to 8th second special game times, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "199", the variation display time of 5 seconds and 0.5 seconds is set so that the fixed display time of is selected. That is, in each game round of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and the fixed display time are standardized, except when the result of the winning lottery is a big win or a small win. .

The variable display time and the fixed display time in the above case are set in relation to the second opening/closing pattern of the accessory opening/closing operation for the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the variable display time and the fixed display time The total (5.5 sec) is the same length as the standby time (5.5 sec) of the second opening/closing pattern. The reason for this will be detailed later. When the variable display time of 5 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, the symbol display device 41 stops displaying the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in combination without executing the ready-to-win display.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation display time setting process in FIG. 25, if the negative determination is made in step S701 or step S702, the corresponding fluctuation display time table variable display time table) to select the variable display time and fixed display time.

After step S704, step S705 or step S706 is executed, at step S707, the variable display time selected at each step is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. The value of the variable display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) is activated. After that, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start processing in FIG. Set as a command to be sent. The special figure variation command includes information on the variation display time (including the presence or absence of reach). In addition, the special figure type command includes the information of the jackpot type and the small hit type (and/or the jackpot pattern and the small hit pattern in the special figure display unit 43).

After that, in step S621, among the first special figure display part AS and the second special figure display part BS, the display part corresponding to the current special figure game cycle starts the variable display of the pattern. In this case, when the second special figure flag is not stored in the RAM 114, it is specified that the result display section corresponding to the current special figure game round is the first special figure display section AS, and the second special figure flag is stored, the result display portion corresponding to the special figure game round of this time is specified as the second special figure display portion BS. After that, the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure game round control process of FIG. , the process proceeds to step S407, and the processing for game round progress in steps S407 and S408 is executed. In the game round progress processing, first, in step S407, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display time of the special figure game round of this time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S408. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the result display section so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display section related to this special game round (light emission control of each display segment ) to end the game round control process.

When the fluctuation display time has passed, a special figure confirmation display process (game turn end process) is executed in step S409. The special figure confirmation display processing is for confirming and displaying the pattern of the special figure display section 43 in the stop result set in the processing of the above step S608, step S614 or step S616. Here, the processing for special figure confirmation display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the processing for special figure confirmation display, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the pattern (stop result) is being displayed in the confirmation manner in the display unit 43 for special figure. If it is determined that the confirmation display is not being performed, then in step S802, processing for setting the confirmation display time is executed. In this step, the fixed display time selected in step S704, step S705 or step S706 of FIG. The value of the fixed display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) is activated.

In the subsequent step S803, the start processing of the finalized display, ie, the processing for stopping and displaying the pattern that is variably displayed in the special figure display section 43 is executed. In this case, based on the stop result setting process of step S608, step S614 or step S616 of FIG. do.

In the following step S804, a special figure fluctuation end command is set, and then the final confirmation display processing is ended. Information of the fixed display time is included in the special figure fluctuation end command. The set special figure fluctuation end command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). By receiving the special figure fluctuation end command, the effect control device 82 grasps that the confirmation display has been started in the special figure display unit 43 and the confirmation display time.

In addition, the setting process (transmission process) of the special figure fluctuation end command may be omitted. In this case, the command is set so that the information of the fixed display time is included in the special figure variation command (step S620 in FIG. 24).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative (it is determined that the confirmation display is in progress), the process advances to step S805 to determine whether or not the confirmation display time has elapsed. When the fixed display time has passed, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S806.

When it determines with the 2nd special figure flag being stored, it progresses to step S807 and performs the process for the end of high frequency support mode for ending high frequency support mode. Further, in step S808, the process for ending the specific state is executed, and then in step S809, the process of clearing (erasing) the second special figure flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is executed. The processing for ending the high frequency support mode in step S807 and the processing for ending the specific state in step S808 will be described in detail later. After execution of step S809 or when negative determination is made in step S805 and step S806, this special figure confirmation display processing is terminated.

In addition, the pattern (stop result) stopped and displayed on each special figure display part AS, BS is confirmed when the next special figure game round (variable display) is not started in the special figure display part where the pattern is stopped and displayed After the display time elapses, the stop display continues. Therefore, if there is no pending memory for the next special game round, a new pending memory is generated, and until the next special game round is started, the result of the lottery of the previous game round The corresponding stop result continues to be displayed. Also, even if the transition to the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, until these game states are completed and a new special game round is started, the special game that triggered the transition to the game state Stop results continue to be displayed.

<Transition processing to small hit gaming state>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 28, description will be given of the transition processing to the small winning game state of step S304 in the normal processing (FIG. 21).

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, is stored when the jackpot game starts, and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S902, and it is determined whether or not the small hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a small winning game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. The small winning game flag is a flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed.

If it is determined that the small winning game is not being executed (the small winning game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S903, and the various small winning flags (step S615 in FIG. 24) are stored in the various flag storage area 114e. Determine whether or not it is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not it is in a small hit winning state.

When it is determined that various small hit flags are stored, at step S904, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the special figure game round. When it is not the end timing of the special figure game round, the transition processing to the main small winning game state is ended as it is. Also, if the affirmative determination (determined that the big hit game is being executed) in the step S901, negative determination in step S903 (determined that various small hit flags are not stored) also, this small hit game state Terminate the transition process to .

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the special figure game round, in step S905, the start processing of the small winning game is executed. In the start process, a small winning game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e, and it is checked that the second variable winning device 32B is in a closed state before starting the small winning game. Also, in this start process, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the second variable winning device 32B at the start of the small winning game is executed. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the first timer counter area TC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. The value (counter value) set in the first timer counter area TC1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

In the subsequent step S906, a process of setting "1" to the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed as the number of times of execution of the round game in the small winning game is set.

In the subsequent step S907, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

In the subsequent step S908, after executing the external signal setting process, the transition process to the main small winning game state is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the small winning signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the small winning signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the small winning signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the small winning signal is output to the management control device, and the small winning signal is output to the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that a hit has occurred.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S902 (determine that the small winning game is being executed), the process proceeds to step S909, and it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. When the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the transition processing to the main small winning game state is terminated as it is.

When the waiting time for opening has passed, the process proceeds to step S910, and a small winning opening/closing process for opening/closing the second big winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Here, the small winning opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29 .

In the small winning opening/closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the second large winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the driving section 353 of the second variable winning device 32B. When the second big winning hole 351 is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" in step S1102, and the first timer counter area TC1 of the RAM 114 is determined in step S1103. is "0".

When the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" or when the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1104, and the small winning results are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the A or small advantage B flag is stored.

If any of the above advantageous small winning flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1105, and "900" (equivalent to 1.8 sec) is set in the first timer counter area TC1 as the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B. to set. On the other hand, if none of the above-described advantageous small winning flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1106, and "50" (equivalent to 0.1 sec) is set in the first timer counter area TC1 as the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B. ).

After execution of step S1105 or step S1106, in step S1107, setting processing of the upper limit winning number to the second variable winning device 32B in the small winning game is performed. Specifically, a value of “10” corresponding to the maximum winning number is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 .

In the subsequent step S1108, the drive unit 353 for the open/close door 352 is driven to open the second variable winning device 32B. Then, in step S1109, an opening command is set, and the main opening/closing process for the small prize is ended. This set open command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

Further, when it is determined in step S1101 that the second big winning port 351 is open, the process proceeds to step S1110 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is "0". . If the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the second variable prize winning device 32B has won a prize. If no prize has been won, the opening/closing process for the main prize is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a prize has been won, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first prize counter area PC1 in step S1112. In the subsequent step S1113, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the opening/closing process for the main small prize is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1113 or step S1110, it means that the conditions for closing the second big winning opening 351 have been met. In such a case, in step S1114, the driving section 353 is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the second big winning opening 351. FIG.

In the following step S1115, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter area RC1, and in step S1116, ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time is set for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the small winning game. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S1117, after setting the ending command, the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

Returning to the description of the transition processing to the small winning game state in FIG. judge. Also, in step S912, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. When the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" or when the waiting time for the ending has not passed, the transition processing to the main small winning game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has passed, the process of ending the small winning game is executed in step S913, and then the main small winning game is played. Terminate state transition processing. Here, the end processing of the small winning game in step S913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the end processing of the small hit game, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. This V winning flag is stored in the V winning process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process of FIG.

Here, the processing for V winning in step S106 will be described. Also, as the processing related to the V prize, the V distribution setting processing in step S307 in the normal processing will be described.

First, the V distribution setting process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the V allocation setting process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small winning game. If it is the start timing, "500" corresponding to 1 sec is set in the second timer counter area TC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 in step S1302. The value (counter value) set in the second timer counter area TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In the subsequent step S1303, "1" is set in the distribution number counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 114d. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution number counter area HC is for the MPU 112 to specify the number of operations of the distribution member 358 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, or if the process of step S1303 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 by grasping the driving state of the distribution member drive unit 359. FIG. If the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the discharge area 357, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is not "0", the main distribution setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not the value of the area HC is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1306, that is, if the value of the distribution number counter area HC is "1", then in step S1307 the distribution member 358 is displaced to the distribution side position to the V winning area 356. Let At next step S1308, the timer counter TC is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec). After execution of step S1308 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the distribution setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, that is, if the distribution member 358 is positioned on the distribution side to the V winning area 356, the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0" in step S1309. It is determined whether or not the period for positioning the distribution member 358 on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 has elapsed. If the determination in step S1309 is affirmative, the distribution member 358 is displaced to a position on the side of distribution to the discharge area 357 in step S1310, and then the value of the distribution number counter area HC is subtracted by 1 in step S1311. Execute the process. After execution of step S1311 or when a negative determination is made in step S1309, the distribution setting process is terminated.

Next, the V winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the V winning process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1402, and whether or not the V winning has occurred based on the detection state of the detection sensor 362 for V winning provided in the second variable winning device 32B (the relevant It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 362 .

If it is determined that the V winning has occurred, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the V winning is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period, and for example, the period during which the small winning game is executed and the V side sorting period of the sorting member 358 are set as the valid period. If it is determined that it is not during the effective period, the process proceeds to step S1404, an error command is set as an object to be transmitted to the effect control device 82, and then this V winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process of the normal processing (FIG. 21), and the production control device 82 displays the display control device 212 so that a predetermined error notification is executed. It controls the light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid period, the process advances to step S1405 to store the V prize flag in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. In the following step S1406, a V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82. The V winning command is a command for notifying the production control device 82 that the V winning has occurred. sent. In the production control device 82, when the V winning command is received, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 announce the occurrence of the V winning, and the production such as congratulating the V winning is executed. The display control device 212 and the like are controlled so that

After execution of step S1406, if affirmative determination is made in step S1401 or negative determination is made in step S1402, this V winning process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the end processing of the small hit game in FIG. 30, when it is determined that the V winning flag is stored in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202 and sets the V winning flag corresponding to the small hit type to run. This processing is performed by referring to various small winning flags stored in the various flags storing area 114e of the RAM 114 and storing the V winning flag corresponding to the small winning flag in the various flags storing area 114e. For example, the small winning game to be terminated is triggered by winning the advantageous small winning result A, and when the advantageous small winning A flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e, the V winning flag The V winning flag A is stored as . The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the V jackpot game should be started and the type of the V jackpot game.

In the subsequent step S1203, a process of erasing the V winning flag, various small winning flags and small winning game flags stored in the various flag storage area 114e is executed. In the following step S1204, a V winning command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and then the end processing of the main small winning game is terminated. The V winning command is a command for notifying the production control device 82 of the start of the V jackpot game and the type of the V jackpot game, and the set V winning command is an external output of normal processing (FIG. 21) It is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the process. In the effect control device 82, when the V winning command is received, the display control device 212 controls the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 or the like executes the effect of notifying that the V jackpot game is started and the type of the V jackpot game. etc.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201 (determined that the V winning flag is not stored), in step S1205, various small hit flags and small hit games stored in various flag storage areas 114e of RAM 114 A process of erasing the flag is executed, and then the end process of the main small winning game is ended.

<Transition processing to jackpot gaming state>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 33, description will be given of the transition processing to the jackpot game state of step S305 in the normal processing (FIG. 21). Of the various processes included in this transition process, the description of the same processes as those included in the transition process to the small winning game state described above will be simplified as appropriate.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small winning game is being executed in the transition processing to the big winning gaming state. When it is determined that the small winning game is being executed, the transition processing to this big winning game state is terminated, and when it is determined that the small winning game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1502, and the big winning game Determine whether it is running.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed, at step S1503, it is determined whether various V winning flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the V jackpot game should be started. When it is determined that various V winning flags are not stored, the process advances to step S1504 to determine whether or not various jackpot flags (step S609 in FIG. 24) are stored in the various flag storage area 114e. That is, it is determined whether or not to start a normal jackpot game that is not a V jackpot game.

When it is determined that the various jackpot flags are not stored, while ending the transition processing to this jackpot game state, when it is determined that the various jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S1505, and the special figure It is determined whether or not it is time to end the game cycle. When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the special figure game round, the transition processing to the main jackpot game state is ended.

When it is determined that it is the end timing of the special game round in step S1505, or when it is determined that various V winning flags are stored in step S1503, the process proceeds to step S1506, and the start processing of the jackpot game is executed. do. In the start process, a jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and an opening period setting process is executed.

In the subsequent step S1507, it is determined whether or not the 15R flag or the V winning flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. If it is determined that these flags are stored, the process advances to step S1508 to execute processing of setting "15" in the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above flags are not stored, the process advances to step S1509 to execute the process of setting "5" in the round counter area RC1.

After execution of step S1508 or step S1509, an opening command is set in step S1510, and furthermore, an external signal setting process is executed in step S1511, and then the transition process to the big hit game state is finished.

Also, when it is determined in step S1502 that the jackpot game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1512 to determine whether or not the opening period has passed. When the opening period has not passed, the transition processing to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1513, and a big win opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is executed. In the opening/closing process for big win, when the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is closed, the opening/closing door 322 is driven on condition that the round number counter RC is "1" or more. By driving the part 323, the first big winning hole 321 is opened. Also, when the first big winning hole 321 is open, a predetermined time (30 sec) has passed since the opening of the big winning hole 321, or a predetermined number (10) of game balls have won. On the condition that the first big prize winning opening 321 is closed, the driving state of the driving section 323 is stopped.

After executing the big win opening/closing process in step S1513, it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". Also, in step S1515, it is determined whether or not the standby time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition processing to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S1516, transition processing at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and then the main jackpot is executed. End the transition processing to the game state. Here, the transition processing at the end of the jackpot game in step S1516 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the transition process at the end of the jackpot game, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the 5R flag A, 15R flag or various V winning flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. That is, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a big win in which the support mode shifts to a high-frequency support after the end of the big win game is stored.

If it is determined that any one of the above flags is stored, the process advances to step S1602 to perform processing for erasing the various jackpot flags, V winning flags, and jackpot game flags stored in the flag storage area 114e. Execute. In the subsequent step S1603, a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e. As a result, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the jackpot game ends. In the subsequent step S1604, the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "9". The value (counter value) of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is for counting the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed in the high-frequency support mode.

In the following step S1605, the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and then in step S1606, high-frequency support for notifying the production control device 82 that the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. A command (high-frequency support setting information) is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 . After execution of step S1606, transition processing at the end of the main jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1601 that the 5R flag A, 15R flag, or various V winning flags are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1607, and the various jackpot flags stored in the various flag storage area 114e, the jackpot game Clear the flag. After that, the transition processing at the end of the main jackpot game is terminated.

Next, the processing for ending the high-frequency support mode in step S807 in the special figure confirmation display processing of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the processing for ending the high frequency support mode, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode is terminated. If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1702. A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is executed. As a result, the number of executions of the special figure game times after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, which is grasped by the MPU 112, is updated.

It should be noted that the end processing of this high-frequency support mode is executed only when the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e at step S806 in the special figure confirmation display process of FIG. be. Therefore, the number of executions of the special figure game rounds after shifting to the high frequency support mode is updated only for the game rounds of the second special figure. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game or in the middle of the high-frequency support mode, the hold information of the first special figure that is disadvantageous to the player is stored and the hold information of the second special figure that is advantageous to the player is stored. Even if there is no situation, the remaining number of special symbol game rounds in the high frequency support mode will not be reduced by the first special symbol game round. As a result, it is possible for the player to preferably enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode that makes it easier to generate a prize for the second operation port 34 and to easily receive the winning lottery of the second special figure. .

In the subsequent step S1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is "0". If it is determined that the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is not "0", the end processing of the high-frequency support mode is terminated, while the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is "0". If so, the process advances to step S1704 to erase the high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e. As a result, the high-frequency support mode ends and the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode. Here, the end processing of this high-frequency support mode is executed when it is determined that the fixed display time has passed in step S805 in the special figure fixed display processing of FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, at the end timing of the confirmation display in the game round of the second special figure of the end reference number of times in the high frequency support mode (the 9th time after shifting to the high frequency support mode), high frequency support Mode is configured to exit.

After execution of step S1704, at step S1705, it is determined whether or not it is during the variable display of the normal figure game round. If it is determined that it is during the variable display of the general figure game round, the process proceeds to step S1706, and the result of the success or failure lottery of the general figure game round is the result corresponding to the open result (per general figure). do. If the result corresponds to the open result, the process proceeds to step S1707, and the process of changing the stop result of the regular game round to the result is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode ends during the variable display of the regular game round, the stop result of the regular game round is forcibly rewritten to the off result. For this reason, even if you win the result corresponding to the open result in the general figure success or failure lottery that was held before the end of the high frequency support mode, after the end of the high frequency support mode, the general electric role based on the winning result The accessory opening/closing game of 34a is not executed. In addition, when the high-frequency support mode ends during the execution of the confirmation display of the regular game round, since the stop result has already been displayed, the change of the stop result of the regular game round is not executed.

After execution of step S1707 or when a negative determination is made in step S1706, the process proceeds to step S1708, and the process of ending the variable display of the normal figure game round is executed. That is, when the high-frequency support mode ends during the variable display of the normal game times, the variable display of the normal game times is terminated at the end timing of the support mode. As a result, the state in which the general pattern game round is given preferential treatment is ended with the end of the high-frequency support mode.

After the execution of step S1708 or in the case of a negative determination (determine that it is not during the fluctuation display of the normal figure game round) in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1709 and notifies the effect control device 82 that the high frequency support mode has ended. A high-frequency support end command for is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 . After step S1709 is executed, the end processing of the high-frequency support mode ends.

Next, the processing for ending the specific state of step S808 in the special figure confirmation display processing of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the process for ending the specific state, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. FIG. As already explained, the specific state flag is for the MPU 112 to grasp the period during which the game can be played by receiving the winning lottery of the second special figure, and is a flag that is set when the high frequency support mode is started. Yes (step S1605 in FIG. 34).

If it is determined that the specific state flag is stored, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. If the high-frequency support flag is not stored, that is, if it is determined that the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, the process advances to step S1803 to check whether the second start pending storage number RbN is "0". judge. That is, it is determined whether or not there is no pending storage of the second special figure.

When it is determined that the number RbN of the second start pending memory is "0", at step S1804, the value of the specific game number counter area OC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is cleared to "0". . As a result, the counting of the number of games of the second special figure in the specific state is completed. In the subsequent step S1805, a process of deleting the specific state flags stored in the various flags storage area 114e is executed.

After execution of step S1805, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, if affirmative determination is made in step S1802, or if a negative determination is made in step S1803, the process for ending the specific state ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the electric support support process at step S306 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the electric role support process, normal game round control process is executed in step S2001, normal game state transition process is executed in step S2002, and this support process ends.

That is, the processing for electric support support basically has the same configuration as the processing configuration of the special figure game round control processing (FIG. 22) and the transition processing to the jackpot game state (FIG. 33). That is, the normal pattern game round control processing of step S2001 corresponds to the special pattern game round control processing of FIG. 22, and the normal pattern game state transition processing of step S2002 corresponds to the transition processing to the jackpot game state of FIG. . Hereinafter, the processing of the game round control processing (step S2001) and the game state transition processing (step S2002) on the normal side will be described in detail.

<Normal map game turn control processing>
First, the normal game round control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In normal figure game time control processing, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening and closing game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . The support state flag is stored when the accessory opening/closing game of the general electric accessory 34a is started in the general pattern game state transition processing to be described later, and the accessory opening/closing game is ended in the general pattern game state transition processing. is erased when

If it is not in the support state, in step S2102, it is determined whether or not the normal diagram display unit 44 is in variable display. In addition, this determination is performed by determining whether or not a flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 during normal pattern fluctuation display. The flag during the normal pattern fluctuation display is stored when the fluctuation display is started for the display unit 44 for the normal pattern, and is erased when the fluctuation display ends.

When the normal map display unit 44 is not in the variable display, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the normal map reservation storage number FN is "0". When the number FN of the normal figure pending storage is "0", the process for electric support is terminated as it is.

If the number of normal map reserved storage FN is not "0", in step S2104 normal map data setting processing for setting the data stored in the reserved area for electric service Rc for variable display is executed. In the normal map data setting process, the normal map reservation storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service reservation area Rc is moved to the normal map execution area. Then, a process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electrician's holding area Rc is executed. Then, the general pattern shift command, which is information for making the performance control device 82 recognize that the data of the reservation area on the general pattern side has been shifted, is set.

In subsequent step S2105, normal pattern fluctuation start processing is executed, and then this normal pattern game round control processing is terminated.

Here, normal figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39 .

In normal figure fluctuation start processing, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 . That is, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the success/failure determination (support lottery) is performed with reference to the success/failure table for the general figure for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 17(a)) in step S2202. If it is the high-frequency support mode, then, in step S2203, the validity determination is performed with reference to the general-purpose drawing validity table for the high-frequency support mode (FIG. 17(b)). As already explained, in the present embodiment, when the support mode is a high-frequency support mode, the winning probability of the general figure success or failure lottery is higher than when it is a low-frequency support mode, and it is easy to win the open result It's becoming

After executing step S2202 or step S2203, in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S2202 or step S2203 is an open result (per normal pattern result). If the open result is won, the process advances to step S2205 to determine whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

When it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, in step S2206, the process of setting the stop result for the low winning accessory open/close game (FIG. 18(a)) is executed. Moreover, in step S2206, the general pattern hit flag for specifying that the result of this general pattern success or failure lottery is the open result in the MPU 112 is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2207, and the process of setting the stop result for the high winning accessory opening/closing game (FIG. 18(b)) is executed. In addition, in step S2207, the general pattern hit flag for specifying that the result of this general pattern success or failure lottery is the open result in the MPU 112 is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in the above step S2204 (it is determined that it is not an open result), the process proceeds to step S2208, and a process of setting the stop result for normal chart deviation is executed.

After executing any of the processing of step S2206 to step S2208, in step S2209, the setting of the normal pattern fluctuation display time for setting the fluctuation display time of the current normal pattern game round in the normal pattern display unit 44 Execute the process.

In the normal figure fluctuation display time setting process, by checking the presence or absence of the high frequency support flag, it is determined whether high frequency support mode or low frequency support mode, and if it is high frequency support mode, ROM 113 The stored normal pattern fluctuation display time information for the high frequency support mode is acquired, and the value corresponding to the information is set in the normal pattern fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114 d of the RAM 114 . In the present embodiment, when the support mode is a high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and the fixed display time of the normal game times are a uniform time regardless of whether the result of the normal game winning lottery is a hit or not. is set to Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, the variable display time and fixed display time are set to 1 sec and 0.5 sec, respectively.

On the other hand, in the case of the low frequency support mode, acquire the general pattern fluctuation display time information for the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 113, and store the value corresponding to the information in the normal pattern fluctuation display time counter area set to When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the regular game round is set to be longer (for example, 30 sec) than when it is the high-frequency support mode. Note that the fixed display time does not necessarily have to be longer than in the high-frequency support mode, and may be the same.

After executing the setting process of the normal pattern fluctuation display time in step S2209, in step S2210, the normal pattern fluctuation command and the normal pattern type command are set. The normal pattern fluctuation command includes information on the normal pattern fluctuation display time. In addition, the general figure type command includes information on the type of the accessory opening and closing game (and/or the stop result of the general figure game round). The normal figure variation command and normal figure type command that have been set are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process.

In the subsequent step S2211, a process for starting the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 44 is executed, and then the normal pattern variation start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the general pattern game round control process (FIG. 38), if it is determined that the fluctuation display is in progress in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2106, whether or not the fluctuation display time of the general pattern game round of this time has elapsed determine whether

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S2107 to execute variable display processing. In the variable display process, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled for display (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal map display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. . After that, the normal figure game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation display time has passed, the process proceeds to step S2108, and the process for general pattern confirmation display is executed. In the normal pattern determination display processing, the variable display of the display unit 44 is ended so that the pattern of the normal pattern display unit 44 is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in steps S2206 to S2208 of FIG. Let Moreover, in this step, the general pattern fluctuation end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 . The information of the fixed display time of the normal figure game round of this time is included in the normal figure fluctuation end command.

<General game state transition processing>
Next, normal figure game state transition processing of step S2002 in the processing for electric support support will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. The accessory opening/closing game flag is a flag indicating that the accessory opening/closing game of the general electric accessory 34a is being executed.

If it is determined that the accessory opening and closing game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2302, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the normal figure game round has ended. When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the normal game round, while ending this game state transition process, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the normal game round, in step S2303, the above various flags are stored. It is determined whether or not the general pattern hit flag is stored in the area 114e. In other words, the result of the general figure success or failure lottery this time is the open result, and it is determined whether or not the opening and closing game of the general electrical role 34a should be started.

When it is determined that the general pattern per flag is not stored, while the game state transition processing is terminated, when it is determined that the normal pattern per flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2304, and opening and closing of the accessory Execute the game start process. In the start process, a role product opening/closing game flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, or setting processing of the opening period of the role product opening/closing game is executed.

In subsequent step S2305, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. This determination is made by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e.

If it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S2306, in order to execute the opening and closing game for the low frequency support mode (low prize opening and closing game (FIG. 18A)), the various counters of the RAM 114 The opening/closing control counter area RC2 provided in the area 114d is set to 1. The opening/closing control counter area RC2 is used to open/close the general electrical equipment 34a from the closed state and then to the closed state. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S2307, and the opening and closing game for the high-frequency support mode (high winning prize opening and closing game (Fig. 18(b)), "4" is set in the opening/closing control counter area RC2.

After performing the process of step S2306 or step S2307, a normal figure opening command is set in step S2308. This set normal figure opening command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. This normal figure opening command includes information indicating the type of the opening and closing game of the opening period as well as the opening period.

In the following step S2309, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the normal figure game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory release signal provided at the external output terminal 99 is set to the release signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the role release signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the role release signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the accessory opening and closing game is executed.

If it is determined in step S2301 that the opening/closing game is being executed, the process advances to step S2310 to determine whether or not the opening period has passed. When it is determined that the opening period has not passed, this game state transition process is ended, while when it is determined that the opening period has passed, the process proceeds to step S2311, and the accessory opening/closing process is executed. . Here, the accessory opening/closing process in step S2311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the accessory opening/closing process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the universal electrical accessory 34a is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the drive state of the electric accessory drive unit 34b. When it is determined that the universal electrical accessory 34a is not open, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "0" in step S2402, and various counters in the RAM 114 are determined in step S2403. It is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area TC3 provided in the area 114d is "0".

When the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "0" or when the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is not "0", the main accessory opening/closing process is terminated, while the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is opened. If the value is not "0" and the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is "0", the process advances to step S2404 to set the electric accessory driving unit 34b to the driving state to open the general electric accessory 34a. (accessory release process).

In the following step S2405, setting processing for each opening/closing control is executed. Setting processing for each opening/closing control will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the setting process for each opening/closing control, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process advances to step S2502 to determine whether the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "4", that is, whether It is determined whether or not the opening operation is the first opening in the high winning accessory opening/closing game. If it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "4", the third timer counter area TC3 is set to "1500" (equivalent to 3 sec) in step S2503. The value set in the set third timer counter area TC3 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, at a cycle of 2 msec.

In the subsequent step S2504, as the upper limit number of prizes to be won to the second operation port 34 in one opening and closing game, the second prize counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 stores " 4” value. After that, the setting process for each opening/closing control ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2502 that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not "4", that is, the opening operation of the general electrical role 34a to be set is the second or subsequent opening in the high winning role opening/closing game. If so, the process advances to step S2505 to set "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) in the third timer counter area TC3. After that, the setting process for each opening/closing control ends.

If it is determined in step S2501 that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2506, and "100" (0 .2 sec) is set. In the following step S2507, the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is set to "10", and then the setting processing for each opening/closing control is finished.

Returning to the description of the accessory opening/closing process in FIG. 42, after executing the setting process for each opening/closing control in step S2405, the normal figure open command is set in step S2406, and the present accessory opening/closing process ends. This set normal figure open command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process.

If it is determined in step S2401 that the universal electrical accessory 34a is open, the process proceeds to step S2407 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is not "0", it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the game ball has entered the second operation opening 34. If it is determined that no prize has been won, the process for opening and closing the prize is ended. After decrementing, it is determined in step S2410 whether or not the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0".

If the value of the third timer counter area TC3 is "0" at step S2407, or if the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0" at step S2410, the closing condition of the general electronic accessory 34a is met. means that In this case, in step S2411, the electric accessory driving unit 34b is put in a non-driving state to close the general electric accessory 34a (accessory closing process).

In the subsequent step S2412, it is determined whether or not the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0". That is, whether the switching to the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a is caused by the passage of the opening time in one opening and closing control, or the number of winning prizes of the game balls to the second operation opening 34 is the upper limit number of winning prizes Determine whether it is caused by reaching When it is determined that the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is not "0", that is, when the general electrical accessory 34a is switched to the closed state due to the passage of the opening time in one opening/closing control , the process advances to step S2413 to decrement the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 by 1. In step S2414, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not "0", in step S2415, "2750" (5.5 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area TC3 as a waiting period until the next opening process is executed. equivalent). In the following step S2416, set a general figure closing command for notifying the production control device 82 that the general electric role 34a has been closed, and then terminate the main role opening and closing process. The set normal figure closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2414 is affirmative, the process advances to step S2417 to set the standby time for the ending of the general pattern. Specifically, a value corresponding to the standby time is set in the opening/closing control counter area RC2. After execution of step S2417, the opening/closing processing of the main character product is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in step S2412 that the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is "0", that is, the winning number of game balls into the second operation opening 34 has reached the upper limit winning number. If the common electric accessory 34a is switched to the closed state, the process proceeds to step S2418 to clear the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 to "0". After that, after setting the waiting time for the normal figure ending in the above step, the opening and closing processing of this accessory is finished. As a result, the accessory opening/closing game ends without executing the remaining opening/closing control.

Returning to the explanation of the normal figure game state transition processing in FIG. judge. Then, in step S2313, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has passed. If the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the end processing of the accessory opening/closing game is executed in step S2314. In the end process, various flags such as the normal figure per flag and the accessory opening/closing game flag are erased. After that, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<About basic playability>
Next, the basic playability of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a state transition diagram showing the transition of game states.

In the normal game state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, as already explained, it is not possible to expect the winning of the second operation port 34 . For this reason, the player hits a game ball to the left route by hitting the ball to the left, aiming to win a prize to the first operation hole 33 .

When a prize is awarded to the first operating port 33, a lottery for the first special figure (jackpot probability 1/200) is executed. Then, when a jackpot is won by the lottery, a jackpot game is executed in which the first variable prize winning device 32A is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (five rounds) (transition route 401). Since only game balls that flow down the right route can win in the first variable prize winning device 32A, the player increases the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 60 and launches the game ball in the right route to play the game. (so-called right-handed).

While the 5R jackpot result B and the 5R jackpot result A are set as the jackpot types of the first special figure, when the jackpot types are sorted to the 5R jackpot result B, the frequency of the support mode after the jackpot game ends is low. It becomes a support mode and returns to the normal game state (transition route 402). In this case, the player returns the shooting mode of the game ball to the left-hand shot, and plays the game again aiming at the occurrence of the first special figure jackpot.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is sorted to the 5R jackpot result A, the support mode after the jackpot game ends shifts to the high-frequency support mode, and the game state is such that the winning to the second operation port 34 is likely to occur ( transition route 403). This state continues until the game round of the second special symbol of the end reference number of times (9 times) is completed, and during this time, the player is likely to receive the winning lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the second operation port 34, the player continues to play the game by hitting to the right even after the end of the jackpot game.

The winning lottery of the 2nd special figure includes a small winning lottery, but if the winning lottery of the 2nd special figure wins a small winning lottery, the high allocation mode (Fig. 16 (b)) A small winning game is executed in which the 2 variable winning device 32B is opened and closed (transition route 404). Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the second variable prize winning device 32B, when a small hit occurs, the player hits to the right to play the game. Then, when a V winning is generated in the small winning game, after the small winning game ends, the V big winning game in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (15 rounds or 5 rounds) is performed. is executed (transition route 405).

The opening time (1.8 sec) of the second variable winning device 32B when the small winning game is executed in the high distribution mode is longer than the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec), and the game ball is operated in the normal mode. is emitted, it is possible to easily generate a prize for the second variable prize winning device 32B. In addition, under the high distribution mode, the period in which the second variable prize winning device 32B is in the open state and the period in which the distribution member 358 is arranged on the V prize area 356 side overlap, and the second variable prize winning A game ball winning in the device 32B is easily sorted to the V winning area 356 side. Therefore, by generating a prize to the second variable prize winning device 32B, a V prize is always generated or almost generated. In other words, the occurrence of a small win can almost certainly lead to the occurrence of a V jackpot.

In this way, the probability of occurrence of the V jackpot is the same as or similar to the probability of winning the small win in the winning lottery of the second special symbol, but the probability of winning the small winning is the same as the probability of winning the big winning in the winning lottery of the first special symbol. It is 1/10, which is higher than the probability. Therefore, in a situation where the support mode has shifted to the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to generate a big win (V big win) with a high probability. That is, the high-frequency support mode in the pachinko machine 10 is a game state equivalent to a high-probability mode (so-called variable probability state or high-probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is increased as a player's feeling.

Furthermore, when the V jackpot occurs, the jackpot types are divided into 16RV jackpot results and 6RV jackpot results with different numbers of rounds. (transition route 406). That is, when the V jackpot occurs while the support mode is shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode again after the V jackpot game ends. Therefore, the game in which the V jackpot occurs under the high-frequency support mode loops, and the game state (the specific state in which the game can be played with the second special figure) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is increased is repeated. By the way, the probability of winning a small hit while performing the second special lottery 9 times (probability of winning a small hit in any of the 9 lotteries), that is, the continuation rate to continue the specific state, It is about 61%.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a holding function that sets the upper limit of the number of second special symbols to four. Therefore, at the end of the high-frequency support mode (at the end of the 9th second special figure game round), if four pieces of the second special figure hold information are stored, even after the end of the high-frequency support mode It is possible to receive the lottery for the second special figure four times (transition route 407). In other words, even if the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode and is internally in the normal game state, the specific state is extended by the number of pending memories of the second special figure at the time of the end of the high-frequency support mode. (Continue). By the way, the probability of winning a small hit while performing the winning lottery of the second special figure four times (the continuation rate of the specific state) is about 34%. And the total continuation rate in the specific state including the high frequency support mode (9 times) is about 75%, and compared to the case where there is no 2nd special pattern hold function, the continuation rate can be greatly increased. be possible.

In addition, in the winning lottery of the second special figure, a big winning lottery is also performed in conjunction with the small winning lottery, and there are times when you win a big hit. In this case, a jackpot game is executed in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed (transition route 408), and after the jackpot game ends, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode (transition route 409). That is, it is possible to loop the game state in which the V jackpot can be generated with a high probability even by winning the jackpot by lottery of the second special figure in the high-frequency support mode. However, the jackpot winning probability in this case is 1/200, which is lower than the small winning winning probability. , V is mainly a game to generate a big hit.

When the reserve memory of the second special figure is used up without generating any of the small win and the big win, the specific state ends and the normal game state is restored (transition route 410). In this case, the player returns the shooting mode of the game ball to the left-hand shot, and plays the game again aiming at the occurrence of the first special figure jackpot.

In this pachinko machine 10, since the win/loss lottery for the first special symbol also includes a small win lottery, a small win based on the win/loss lottery for the first special symbol can occur in the normal game state. However, in the small winning game in this case, since the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to open and close in the low allocation mode (FIG. 16(a)), V winning does not occur and the V big winning game is not executed. It's becoming

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow will be described. First, the game flow when the support mode is the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. Here, it is assumed that the results of each normal figure success or failure lottery are all open results.

After the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode at timing t1, when the player hits to the right and the game ball enters the through gate 35, the normal game round is executed (timing t2 to timing t3). Specifically, after the pattern of the normal pattern display unit 44 is variably displayed for 1 second, which is the normal pattern fluctuation display time, it is stopped and displayed with the stop result corresponding to the opening result, and that state is the normal pattern fixed display time. It continues for a certain 0.5 sec.

When the general pattern game round ends at timing t3, the opening and closing game of the general electrical accessory 34a is executed. Since the accessory opening and closing game in this case is a high winning accessory opening and closing game (FIG. 18(b)), first, the general electric accessory 34a is opened for 3 seconds, which is the opening time of the first opening and closing pattern. Thus, the opening and closing game of the accessory is executed. In this case, 3 sec, which is the opening time of the general electric accessory 34a, is the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec) and the upper limit number of winnings to the second operation port 34, which is one of the termination conditions of the accessory opening and closing game. (4 pieces) and the product (2.4 sec) or more, the winning to the second operation opening 34 equal to or more than the upper limit winning number occurs within the opening time.

When the first winning to the second operation port 34 occurs at the timing t4, the pending information of the second special figure is stored. In this case, since the reserved memory number of the second special symbol immediately before the winning is 0, the second special symbol game round is started based on the occurrence of the winning. Also, when a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.

After that, when a total of three game balls enter the second operation opening 34 at each timing of timings t5 to t7, the number of winning game balls into the second operation opening 34 reaches the upper limit winning number, and the accessory opening and closing game is started. finish. That is, even if there is a remaining period of the open time, the general electrical accessory 34a is closed, and the second opening/closing pattern scheduled after the first opening/closing pattern is not executed. Game ends.

In addition, after the game round of the second special symbol is started, three game balls enter the second operation opening 34, thereby increasing the number of pending memories of the second special symbol to three (timing t7).

When the accessory opening and closing game ends at timing t7, the next normal game round is executed (a winning to the through gate 35 occurs between timings t2 to t7, and the number of reserved memories of the normal pattern is 1 or more assumed). Then, when the general-purpose game cycle ends at timing t8, the high-winning prize opening/closing game of the universal electrical role 34a is executed again. Also in this case, the winning number of game balls into the second operation port 34 reaches the upper limit winning number before the opening time of the first opening/closing pattern of 3 seconds elapses, and the accessory opening/closing game ends. At this time, assuming that the first winning prize occurs during the execution of the first special figure game round started from timing t4, the number of pending memories of the second special figure increases by one due to the winning. , reaches the upper limit of 4 (timing t9).

Further, when the first special figure game round ends at timing t10, the second special figure game round is started. As a result, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is reduced by one to three, but the third game ball wins the second operation opening 34 at the timing t11 immediately after that, so that the second special figure The reserved information in the figure is replenished, and the number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit of 4 again.

After that, at timing t12, the fourth game ball wins the second operation port 34, but the winning in this case is the winning when the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaches the upper limit number. The pending information based on the winning is not stored, and the winning becomes invalid.

In this way, in the accessory opening/closing game of the general electric accessory 34a, the first opening/closing pattern capable of allowing the upper limit winning number of game balls to enter the second operation opening 34 is executed prior to the second opening/closing pattern. With this aspect, winning to the second operation port 34 can be generated frequently. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is not set to 0, in other words, a good game can be played without interrupting the game round of the second special symbol. In addition, when a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out each time, so the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls in his possession too much. That is, the player can play a game in the high-frequency support mode in a state in which the advantage of the high-frequency support mode is favorably exhibited.

Next, the flow of the game at the end of the high frequency support mode and after the end will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, at timing t1 before the end of the high-frequency support mode (timing t3), the opening and closing game of the general electric role 34a (high winning role opening and closing game) is started, and the opening and closing game of the general electric role is started. Assume that the included first opening/closing pattern ends at timing t2, which is earlier than the end timing (timing t3) of the high-frequency support mode. Also, at the end of the high frequency support mode, it is assumed that the number of pending memories of the second special figure is four, which is the upper limit number.

When the high-frequency support mode ends at timing t3, one reserved memory of the second special figure that is reserved at that time is consumed, and the first game round of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode is started. be done. This game cycle continues until timing t7 after 5.5 seconds, which is the sum of the variable display time of 5 seconds and the fixed display time of 0.5 seconds.

In addition, at the timing t4 after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the first opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern (the second opening/closing control in the high winning role opening/closing game) is started, and the general electric role 34a is opened. can be switched. This open state continues for an open time (1 sec) that is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball and shorter than the period of two cycles (1.2 sec) of the firing cycle. During the period in which the accessory 34a is switched to the open state, one game ball wins the second operation opening 34 (timing t5). As a result, one pending memory of the second special figure is added, and the number of memories reaches the upper limit number again.

Then, when the opening time has passed at timing t6, the universal electrical accessory 34a is switched to the closed state, and this state continues for 5.5 seconds, which is the standby time (timing t8). In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, since the execution period of the second special game round is set to the same length as the waiting time, the second opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern (high winning accessory opening/closing game The first game round of the second special figure ends (timing t7) before the timing t8 at which the opening and closing control of the third time in) is started. That is, at the timing t7 before the start timing of the second opening and closing control (timing t8), the oldest of the pending information of the second special figure is used, the second special figure of the second A game round is started.

Then, when the second opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern is started at timing t8, the common electric accessory 34a is switched to the open state. Since the opening in this case is also longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and is performed over an opening time (1 sec) shorter than the period of two cycles of the firing cycle, one game ball wins in the second operation port 34. (timing t9). At the timing just before the winning, the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 3, and one vacancy occurs up to the upper limit number (4). For this reason, due to the occurrence of the winning, one piece of reservation information of the second special figure is added, and the number of pieces of reservation storage becomes four again.

After that, in a state where the number of pending memories of the second special figure is 3, the third opening/closing control in the second opening/closing pattern is executed (timing t10 to timing t12), and during this period one game ball The second operation opening 34 is won (timing t11). As a result, one pending memory of the second special figure is added, and the number of memories becomes four again.

In this way, the second opening/closing pattern is executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode, and the general electric role 34a is opened three times, so that the second special feature can be obtained in the game after the end of the mode. You can add three pieces of pending information in the figure. Therefore, after the end of high-frequency support mode, 4 times corresponding to the number of pending memories (4) at the end of high-frequency support mode, and the additional amount (3) after the end of high-frequency support mode It is possible to execute the game round of the second special figure over 7 times, which is the total of 3 times. By the way, the probability of winning a small hit while performing the winning lottery of the second special figure seven times (the continuation rate of the specific state) is about 52%. In other words, the number of games of the second special figure that is executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode is less than the number of reserved memories (4 times) at the end of the high-frequency support mode (about 34%). It is possible to greatly increase the probability of winning a winning prize.

In addition, the number of additional games of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode is not uniformly 3 times, and there is a difference depending on the progress of the opening and closing game at the end of the high-frequency support mode. occur.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(a), during the execution of the first second special figure game round after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the third opening operation of the high winning accessory opening and closing game In the case of the degree of progress in which (the second opening operation in the second opening/closing pattern) is performed, it is possible to add the game round of the second special figure twice after the end of the high-frequency support mode. In this case, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the game round of the second special figure can be executed six times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47(b), during the execution of the first game round of the second special figure, the fourth opening operation of the high winning accessory opening/closing game (the third opening in the second opening/closing pattern action) is performed, it is possible to add one game round of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode. In this case, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the game round of the second special figure can be executed five times.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the waiting time between the first opening/closing pattern and the second opening/closing pattern is set to the same length as the waiting time between each opening of the second opening/closing pattern, so FIG. 4, if the progress is such that the high-frequency support mode ends during the execution of the first opening/closing pattern, it is possible to add the game round of the second special figure four times. In this case, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the game round of the second special figure can be executed eight times.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47(d), during execution of the confirmation display in the final game round of the high frequency support mode, when the fourth opening operation of the high winning accessory opening and closing game is performed, It is not possible to add the game round of the second special figure after the end of the frequency support mode. In this case, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to execute 4 games, which are reserved at the end of the mode. %.

In this way, depending on the progress of the opening and closing game at the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a small hit in the specific state (continuation rate of the specific state) greatly changes. The player's interest can be attracted to the progress of the game round of the second special figure, their deviation (phase difference), etc., and it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, by opening the general electric role 34a in a manner that allows the winning of the second operation opening 34, the game round of the second special figure is added. However, if it is only possible to win a prize to the second operation port 34 after the end of the mode, the high winning accessory can be obtained only by the first opening/closing pattern without providing the second opening/closing pattern. Constructing an opening and closing game is also conceivable. This is because if all or part of the first opening/closing pattern is executed after the high-frequency support mode ends, the winning of the second operation port 34 can occur.

However, in the above case, during the period during which the game of the second special figure is executed once, the maximum winning number (4), which is one of the conditions for ending the accessory opening/closing game, can occur. For example, if the high frequency support mode ends with the number of reserved memories of the second special figure reaching the upper limit, the number of reserved memories of the second special figure will be Although one is added, the remaining winnings will be invalid winnings and will not add the number of reserved memories of the second special figure. On the other hand, even though it is an invalid winning, the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 is counted. It will end the game. In this case, even if the next game round is started and there is a vacancy in the reserved memory number, the general electric accessory 34a is not released after the start of the next game round because the accessory opening/closing game has already ended. Therefore, no new pending memory is generated, and the number of additional game rounds after the end of the high-frequency support mode is limited to one.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, the second opening/closing pattern is in a mode in which it is impossible to generate the maximum number of winnings during the period in which the game round of the second special figure is executed once. Ending of the accessory opening/closing game during execution of the game times is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the general electric accessory 34a to be opened over a plurality of game rounds, and it is possible to add the second special figure game rounds a plurality of times after the end of the high-frequency support mode.

In particular, the opening time of the general electric accessory 34a in one opening operation is set to a length that allows the winning of the second operation opening 34 to occur only once, and such an opening operation is the second special Since it is a configuration that can occur only once during execution of the game round of the figure, it is possible to replenish the reserved memory of the second special figure one by one while creating a space in the reserved memory number of the second special figure. As a result, it is possible to efficiently add pending information while suppressing the occurrence of invalid winnings (decrease in the number of remaining winnings up to the maximum number of winnings), and to maximize the number of games that can be added. Become.

In such a case, as in the present embodiment, the standby time of the second opening/closing pattern is not limited to the same length as the execution period of the game round of the second special figure (Fig. 49(a)). As shown in 49 (b), even in a configuration in which the waiting time is longer than the execution period, the second special figure is reserved one by one while creating a space in the number of reserved memories of the second special figure. can be supplemented. However, in this case, the period during which the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state becomes longer. There is a possibility that the decrease in possession balls will be accelerated.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, the standby time of the second opening and closing pattern is the same length as the execution period of the game round of the second special figure, so that the opening of the general electric accessory 34a and the subsequent opening It is suppressed that the opening is executed across the game times of the second special figure. Therefore, it is possible to cause one release in each game round (see FIGS. 49(a) and 46), suppressing the occurrence of waste balls (decrease in possession balls), and adding the second It becomes possible to secure the maximum number of game times of the special figure.

In addition, the second opening/closing pattern is not limited to a configuration in which the standby time is the same length as the execution period of the game cycle of the second special figure, and the former may be shorter than the latter. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the execution of the previous release and the subsequent release of the general electric accessory 34a across the game rounds of the second special figure. However, if it is shortened excessively, the maximum winning number may be won in the period of executing the game round of the second special figure once, and the number of game rounds that can be added is only one. Therefore, it is preferable to set the standby time shorter than the execution period within a range in which the maximum number of winnings cannot be generated in the period during which the game is executed once. As a result, it is possible to add the game times of the second special figure a plurality of times while suppressing the occurrence of useless balls.

By the way, in the case shown in FIG. 46, during the period (timing t1 to timing t2) in which the general electrical accessory 34a is controlled to open and close in the first opening and closing pattern, the game ball is continuously shot aiming at the second operation opening 34, When the upper limit winning number (four) of game balls is entered into the operation port 34, the high winning accessory opening/closing game ends at that time. In this case, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the general electric accessory 34a is not controlled to be opened/closed in the second opening/closing pattern, and it becomes impossible to add the second special figure pending information. Also, even if the number of winnings to the second operation port 34 generated during the above period is less than the upper limit number of winnings, the remaining number up to the upper limit number of winnings is reduced. In this case, although the second opening/closing pattern is executed after the execution of the first opening/closing pattern, the number of openings of the general electrical accessory 34a is less than in the case where no prize is won during the above period. As a result, the number of games that can be added after the mode ends is reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the mode changes depending on the shooting mode of the game ball in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode (winner status to the second operation opening 34). ing. For example, regardless of how the game is played in the high-frequency support mode, if the mode is ended by playing a predetermined number of times, it is only hoped that a win will occur during the mode. It could end up being something that just does the firing operation indifferently. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, not only is the game aimed at generating a win, but also the enjoyment of shooting game balls in a manner in which the degree of advantage of the game after the mode is finished can be added, and high frequency support can be added. It is possible to suitably liven up the game during the mode. Not only that, there is also the advantage that the room for technical intervention by the player is expanded, and that the degree of concentration of the player on the game is favorably improved.

In the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 and the speaker unit 64, the game ball is not fired from the middle of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode, or the game ball is fired in a manner that does not win the second operation hole 34. , it is preferable to make a notification explicitly or suggesting that the degree of advantage of the mode end game is increased. As a result, the player can know the existence of the above function, and it is suppressed that the meaning of the function is not exhibited.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

When the high-frequency support mode ends in the middle of the high winning role opening/closing game, the continuation of the high winning role opening/closing game is executed even after the end of the mode, and the high winning role opening/closing game is the first opening/closing. The configuration includes the pattern and the second opening/closing pattern.

Among these, the second opening/closing pattern has a long standby time between each opening of the general electrical accessory 34a (see FIG. 18(b)), and the frequency of winning the second operation opening 34 is relatively suppressed. It has become. For this reason, invalid winning (winning to the second operation port 34 that occurs in a situation where the number of reservations RbN of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit, and the reservation information corresponding to the winning is not stored) Occurrence It is possible to generate the winning to the second operation opening 34 while suppressing the . Therefore, in a situation where the high winning accessory opening/closing game started before the end of the high frequency support mode continues even after the mode ends, if the second opening/closing pattern is executed after the mode ends, the upper limit winning number ( Winning to the second operating port 34 can be generated while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls remaining until the number of winning balls to the second operating port 34 ending one accessory opening/closing game. In other words, the pending information can be added while continuing the subsequent accessory opening/closing game for a long time after the end of the mode, and the player can expect to add a large amount of pending information while playing the game.

The effect of adding hold information (and by extension, adding the game round of the second special pattern) after the end of the mode is as described above with reference to FIG. It is something to give. Therefore, the player can greatly enjoy the game at the end of the high-frequency support mode and after the end of the high-frequency support mode, and it is possible to suitably enhance the amusement.

On the other hand, however, if the high winning accessory opening/closing game is composed only of the second opening/closing pattern, the second special figure holding number RbN does not accumulate in the game during the high frequency support mode, and the number of possession balls is reduced. There is a risk that the player will be dissatisfied with the game.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, in addition to the second opening/closing pattern in the high winning accessory opening/closing game, the first opening/closing pattern (see FIG. 18(b)) in which the frequency of occurrence of winning to the second operating opening 34 is increased. ) is provided. As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily secure the opportunity to store the hold information and pay out the prize balls during the high-frequency support mode, thereby suppressing the decrease in the number of holds RbN and the number of balls in possession. In addition, the first opening/closing pattern is executed prior to the second opening/closing pattern in the high winning accessory opening/closing game, and furthermore, the second operation opening 34 can win the maximum winning number. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, if the player shoots game balls in a normal operation mode, the upper limit winning number is reached before the end of the first opening/closing pattern, and naturally before the start of the second opening/closing pattern. The high winning accessory opening/closing game is ended. This avoids the implementation of the second opening/closing pattern, making it equivalent to a configuration in which the pattern does not exist. That is, the high-frequency support mode in which the first opening/closing pattern can absorb the disadvantages of the second opening/closing pattern (the number of retained RbN and the number of balls held are likely to be accelerated), and preferential treatment is given to the second opening 34. It is possible for the player to enjoy the benefits of

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a game in which pending information can be added after the end of the mode while favorably coexisting with the game in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to favorably enhance the interest of the game after the mode ends without impairing the superiority of the mode.

Concerning the second opening/closing pattern executed after the first opening/closing pattern, it is impossible to generate the winning of the upper limit number of prizes during the period of executing the game round of the second special figure once after the end of the high-frequency support mode. and In this case, the second opening/closing pattern can be executed across one game round, and the second opening/closing pattern can be continued even after the start of the next game round. In the variable display time table storage area 113c, when the game round is started, the number RbN of the second special figure is reduced by one. It becomes possible to replenish the reserved information even during execution of the game round. In other words, it becomes possible to replenish (add) the pending information a plurality of times, and the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode can be favorably livened up.

The second opening/closing pattern that suppresses the frequency of winning to the second operation port 34 is configured to make the above-mentioned winning more likely than the low-wining accessory opening/closing game for the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 18(a)). . According to this configuration, even though the second opening/closing pattern could be generated after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the event that the winning to the second operation opening 34 does not occur at the same level as in the low-frequency support mode. The occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, the desire to generate the second opening/closing pattern after the end of the high-frequency support mode is favorably increased, and the amusement of the game can be greatly enhanced compared to the game in which the mode is simply digested. Also, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 60 during the high-frequency support mode, the second opening and closing pattern may be executed during the mode, but even in such a case, the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is 0 It is possible to suppress the individualization and rapid decrease.

For the second opening/closing pattern, each opening time of the general electric accessory 34a is set to be equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and to be less than twice the firing cycle. According to this configuration, since each opening time is equal to or longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball, it is possible to reliably generate the winning of the second operation opening 34 . On the other hand, since each opening time is less than twice the firing period, it is suppressed that two or more game balls enter the second operation opening 34, and the number of remaining balls is reduced to the upper limit winning number. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second opening/closing pattern, which is implemented after the end of the high-frequency support mode, from being ended prematurely, and the player can easily enjoy the game after the end of the mode.

For the second opening/closing pattern, the waiting time between each opening is configured to be less than or equal to the execution period of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to replenish the reserved information one by one in each round of the game, and it is possible to replenish the reserved information efficiently.

When the high winning accessory opening/closing game is executed straddling the end of the high frequency support mode, instead of controlling the shooting mode of the game balls on the pachinko machine 10 side so that the second opening/closing pattern occurs after the mode ends, The configuration is such that it is entrusted to the player's shooting operation. That is, the player can select whether to aim for winning the second operation opening 34 under the first opening/closing pattern or to aim for the second operation opening 34 under the second opening/closing pattern. As a result, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and the interest and the degree of concentration on the game are favorably improved compared to the game that simply aims to win the second operation opening 34 during the execution of the high winning accessory opening and closing game. can be enhanced.

Further, the above configuration can also be said to be a game feature in which the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the mode changes depending on the shooting mode of the game ball in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode. With such a configuration, the game in the final game cycle is favorably enhanced, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game until the end of the high-frequency support mode. In addition, since the last game round is targeted, the game rounds up to the last round can be played in a normal operation mode, and adverse effects on the original high-frequency support mode game can be suitably suppressed.

<Second Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is possible to add additional game rounds after the end of the high-frequency support mode, and an effect is executed according to the number of game rounds that can be added. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special effect performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 as the notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect.

The special effect is executed in accordance with the end timing of the high-frequency support mode. In the special effect, a first effect display 501 and a second effect display 502 are displayed on the display screen G. FIG.

The first effect display 501 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen G. FIG. A first display area 504 and a second display area 505 are provided in the first effect display 501 . In the first display area 504, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol at that time, that is, the image H for the number of memories corresponding to the number of games of the second special symbol whose implementation is confirmed is displayed. be done. On the other hand, in the second display area 505, the number of additional number images L corresponding to the number of games of the second special figure that can be added after the end of the high-frequency support mode is displayed.

The additional number image L is displayed in a display mode different from the stored number image H, and can be distinguished from the stored number image H. FIG. For example, the additional number image L is displayed with a higher degree of transparency than the stored number image H, and is less conspicuous than the image H. In addition, the sizes, shapes, and colors of both images H and L may be different.

It should be noted that the additional number image L indicates the number of games that are expected to be added thereafter, and does not indicate the number that has actually been added.

The second effect display 502 is displayed on the right side of the display screen G below the first effect display 501 . In the second effect display 502, along with a predetermined female character, a first image 506 that teaches the number of pending memories of the second special symbol at that time, and a game of the second special symbol that can be added after the high-frequency support mode ends. A second image 507 teaching the number of times is displayed. In these images 506 and 507, the pending storage count and the addable count are indicated by numbers, respectively.

In addition, the display mode of the special effect is not limited to the above. Any other display mode may be used as long as the player can recognize the number of times.

<Special effect processing>
Next, the special effect processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is executed as part of regular processing started by the MPU 242 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

In the special effect processing, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the special effect is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special effect flag is stored in each flag storage area of the RAM 244 . The special effect flag is for the MPU 242 to specify that the special effect is being executed, is stored when the special effect is started, and is deleted when the special effect is finished.

If it is determined that the special effect is not being executed, the process advances to step S3002 to determine whether or not a high-frequency support command has been received as a transmission command from the main control device 81 . The high-frequency support command is transmitted when the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3003, and the game cycle being executed is the final game cycle in the high-frequency support mode (9th second special figure game cycle). Determine whether or not there is This determination is made, for example, by including information indicating how many times the game is in the transmission command (for example, a variation start command) from the main control device 81, and determining what number of times the game is based on the command. may be grasped and carried out. Further, the MPU 242 may count the number of executions of the second special figure after shifting to the high-frequency support mode, and may be performed based on the result.

When it is determined that it is the final game round, the process proceeds to step S3004, and the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure at that time is grasped. In this step, based on the pending display control command (a pending command or a shift command) transmitted from the main control device 81, processing for grasping the pending number RbN is executed.

In the following step S3005, it is determined whether or not the pending number RbN of the second special figure is "0". If it is determined that the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3006, and it is determined whether or not it is time to start the special effect. In the present embodiment, the start timing of the special effect is the start timing of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode. The special effects are characterized by directing the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode. is notified), it may function as a preliminary suggestion that the result of the final game round is a losing result. In order to suppress this, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the special effect is set as described above.

If it is determined that it is not the time to start the special effect, the special effect processing is terminated. It should be noted that if a negative determination is made in step S3002 (determined that the high-frequency support command has not been received), if a negative determination is made in step S3003 (determined that it is not the final game round), or if a positive determination is made in step S3005 (second special Also when it is determined that the number of reservations RbN in the figure is "0"), the processing for this special effect is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the special effect, the process proceeds to step S3007, and the number of games of the second special figure that can be added after the end of the high-frequency support mode (additionable reservation number SA) Execute processing to understand. Here, the processing for grasping the addable pending number SA will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52(a).

First, in step S3101, in the grasping process of the number SA that can be added, the degree of progress (progress or degree of progress) of the accessory opening/closing game at the production start timing is grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the elapsed period Ta from the timing t1 at which the opening and closing game of the universal electric accessory 34a is started to the timing t2 at which the special effect is started is grasped.

In the following step S3012, each execution period is grasped for each game round of the second special figure executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, for the game round of the second special figure that is executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the execution period of the game round (the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time) in the case of a loss result is uniformly Where it is set to 5.5 sec (see FIG. 26), the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 stores information indicating the execution period of the game times of these second special symbols. In this step, the start timing and end timing of each game round after the end of the mode are specified based on the information indicating the execution period of the game round of the second special figure, and the grasping process is executed.

Specifically, it is assumed that the game round of the second special figure executed after the end of the high frequency support mode is all out, and the first game round after the end of the mode is started from the production start timing. The elapsed period (period from timing t2 to timing t3) Tb1 until the end of the first game round (period from timing t2 to timing t5) Tb2 is grasped. Also, for the second and subsequent game rounds, elapsed periods Tb3 and Tb4 from the performance start timing to the end of the game round are grasped.

The number of game rounds to which each elapsed period is to be grasped may be determined based on the length of the executable time of the accessory opening/closing game and the length of the execution period of each game round. If there is a possibility of pending addition only up to the fourth game round as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 48(c)), it is sufficient to grasp each elapsed period up to the fourth game round. .

In the following step S3103, the number of game rounds in which the general electric accessory 34a is released during execution of the game rounds is grasped. This process includes the grasping result of the step S3101 and the time information of the accessory opening/closing game stored in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 (the number of openings of the general electric accessory 34a related to the high frequency accessory opening/closing game, each opening time and information indicating each waiting time, etc.).

Specifically, based on the elapsed period Ta grasped in step S3101 and the time information information of the opening and closing game of the accessory, the elapsed period from the production start timing to the start of the first opening after the end of the high-frequency support mode. (Period from timing t2 to timing t4) Tc1 is grasped. When there is a second or subsequent release after the mode ends, the elapsed periods Tc2 and Tc3 from the timing of the start of the presentation to the start of each release are also grasped.

After that, each of the grasped elapsed periods Tc1 to Tc3 is sequentially compared with the execution period (elapsed periods Tb1 to Tb4) of each game round grasped in the above step S3012. It is determined whether or not the accessory 34a is released. For example, when the elapsed period Tc1 until the first opening is compared with the elapsed periods Tb1 and Tb2 of the first game round, if there is a relationship of Tb1<Tc1<Tb2, the general electric role 34a is opened in the first game round. and judge. Then, when it is determined that the general electric role 34a is released, 1 is added to the number of game times in which the general electric role 34a is released, and finally the total number of such game times is derived.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the execution period of the game round of the second special figure and the mode of the accessory opening and closing game are set so that the opening of the general electrical accessory 34a occurs once in each game round after the end of the mode. is set. For this reason, the above total number is n, the number of openings in the accessory opening and closing game, and m is the order of opening the general electric accessory 34a that occurs in the first game after the end of the mode (what number is the opening). , it can also be derived by (nm)+1.

In subsequent step S3104, the number (total number) of games ascertained in step S3103 is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 244 as the addable reservation number SA, and then the process of grasping the addable reservation number SA is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special effect processing in FIG. 51, after executing the grasping process of the addable reservation number SA in step S3007, whether or not the value of the addable reservation number SA is "1" or more in step S3008 That is, it is determined whether or not it is possible to add pending information (game times) after the end of the high-frequency support mode. In addition, as a case where it is not possible to add pending information after the end of the high-frequency support mode, there is a case where the high-winning accessory opening and closing game being executed at the start timing of the special effect ends before the end of the high-frequency support mode. .

When it is determined that the value of the addable reservation number SA is not equal to or greater than "1" (when it is "0"), the processing for this special effect is terminated as it is, and the special effect is not executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the addable reservation number SA is equal to or greater than "1", effect start processing is executed in step S3009. In this step, a special effect flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 .

In the subsequent step S3010, display processing of the effect start display DR1 is executed. The effect start display DR1 serves as a base display for the special effect, and specifically, it is the effect display of the display mode shown in FIG. In this step, a command including information indicating the display contents of the effect start display DR1 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the effect start display DR1 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

Also, in step S3010, the sound data for the special effect stored in the ROM 243 is read, and the speaker unit 64 is driven and controlled so that the effect sound such as "chance time" is output.

If the affirmative determination is made in the above step S3001 (determining that the special effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S3011, and it is determined whether or not it is time to start the game round of the second special figure. This determination is made by determining whether or not a variation start command for the second special figure is received from the main control device 81 .

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the game round of the second special figure, the process proceeds to step S3012, and the image H for the number of memories displayed in the special effect (the second special figure actually held and stored Display processing for subtraction display DR2 is executed in order to reduce the number of display indicating the number of pending information. In the subtraction display DR2, as shown in FIG. 53(a), one of the memory number images H displayed in the first effect display 501 is erased, and the image H displayed in the first image 506 of the second effect display 502 is erased. A number (a number indicating the number of pieces of reservation information of the second special figure actually held and stored) is displayed by subtracting one.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of subtraction display DR2 is output to display control device 212 . The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the subtraction display DR2 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G.

After execution of step S3012 or when a negative determination is made in step S3011, it is determined in step S3013 whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is being opened. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the general pattern open command is received as a transmission command from the main control device 81, or the general pattern close command is received after the general pattern open command is received.

When it is determined that the universal electrical accessory 34a is being opened, the process proceeds to step S3014, and the display processing of the guidance display DR3 is executed. In the guide display DR3, as shown in FIG. 53(b), for example, "Chance! Aim for an electric chew" or the like is displayed in order to prompt the operation of shooting a game ball aimed at the general electric accessory 34a (the second operation opening 34). is displayed on the guide image 509.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of guidance display DR3 is output to display control device 212 . The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the guide display DR3 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. It also drives and controls the speaker unit 64 so as to output a predetermined effect sound for guidance.

In the following step S3015, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure has increased. This determination is made based on the pending display control command transmitted from the main controller 81 . When it is determined that the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure has increased, the process proceeds to step S3016, and the display processing of the addition display DR4 is executed. In the addition display DR4, as shown in FIG. 53(c), an addition time image 510 for notifying that the game round of the second special figure has been added and the number of the added game rounds is displayed. In addition, in order to update the display content of the first effect display 501 to the display content corresponding to the addition of the game round of the second special figure, one of the additional number images L is changed to the memory number image H change to Furthermore, in order to update the number displayed in the first image 506, it is changed to a number corresponding to the number displayed in the image H for memory number. It should be noted that when the number of game rounds is added, the number of game rounds that can be added thereafter is reduced by one. to change its display contents.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of addition display DR4 is output to display control device 212 . The display control device 212 having received the command reads the image data for the addition display DR4 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. It also drives and controls the speaker unit 64 so as to output a predetermined effect sound for guidance.

Also, in step S3016, the sound data for the special effect stored in the ROM 243 is read, and the speaker unit 64 is driven and controlled so as to output a sound effect such as "Yah!".

After the execution of step S3016, if negative determination in step S3013 (determine that the general electrical role 34a is not open), or negative determination in step S3015 (determine that the number of pending RbN of the second special figure has not increased) If so, in step S3017, it is determined whether or not the game round of the second special figure has ended. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the special figure fluctuation end command for the second special figure is received from the main control device 81 .

When it is determined that the game round of the second special figure has ended, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is "0" in step S3018. That is, it is determined whether or not the specific state has ended. When it is determined that the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is "0", the process proceeds to step S3019, and the display processing of the effect end display DR5 is executed. In the effect end display DR5, as shown in FIG. 53(d), an end time image 511 for notifying that the special effect has ended is displayed.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the effect end display DR5 is output to the display control device 212. FIG. The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the effect end display DR5 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Further, the speaker section 64 is driven and controlled so as to output a predetermined effect sound for ending.

In the subsequent step S3020, the effect end processing is executed to erase the special effect flags stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, and then the special effect processing is ended. Also, when a negative determination is made in step S3017 or step S3018, this special effect processing is terminated.

<About the flow of the special production>
Next, the flow of special effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is an explanation for explaining the flow of the special effect. Here, at the start of the special effect (at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode), the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is 4, and after the end of the high-frequency support mode, 3 games A case where it is possible to add times will be described as an example. Since the operations other than the special effect are substantially the same as those in FIG. 46, the description will be omitted or simplified as appropriate.

At timing t1, which is the start timing of the special effect, an effect start display DR1 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁In this case, the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is 4, and it is possible to add 3 game rounds after the end of the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in the effect start display DR1, a first effect display 501 is displayed in which four stored number images H and three additional number images L are displayed. In addition, the first image 506 notifying that the number of game rounds of the second special figure whose implementation is confirmed is 4, and the game round of the second special figure that can be added after the high frequency support mode ends A second image 507 notifying that the number of times is three is displayed.

As a result, the player can understand that the game rounds of the second special figure can be executed four times after the end of the high-frequency support mode, and that there is a possibility that the game rounds can be additionally executed three times. . As for the latter, since the addition is not confirmed at the time when the effect start display DR1 is displayed, the player carries out the subsequent game with the goal of actually adding the three game rounds. be able to.

At timing t2, when the first game round after the end of the high-frequency support mode is started, the subtraction display DR2 is displayed on the display screen G. In subtraction display DR2 in this case, as shown in FIG. "4" is updated to "3". Further, in the subtraction display DR2, an execution number display 512 is displayed to notify that it is the first game round after the mode is ended, in other words, that it is the first chance game. Note that the subtraction display DR2 is not displayed only momentarily at the timing t2, but continues to be displayed thereafter as long as there is no need to change the display content during the execution period of the special effect.

When the universal electrical accessory 34a is released at timing t3, a guidance display DR3 shown in FIG. 53(b) is displayed on the display screen G. The guide display DR3 basically continues to be displayed while the universal electrical accessory 34a is open.

After that, at the timing t4, when the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs and the pending information of the new second special figure is stored, the addition display DR4 is displayed on the display screen G. In the addition display DR4 at this time, as shown in FIG. 53(c), one of the three additional number images L displayed in the first effect display 501 changes to the stored number image H. is displayed. Also, the number display 506a of the first image 506 changes from "3" to "4", and the number display 507a of the second image 507 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, in the addition display DR4, an addition time image 510 is displayed to notify that one game round of the second special figure has been added.

This display informs the player that the game round of the second special figure has been added, and more specifically, that one of the games displayed as being able to be added has actually been added. As a result, the player's joy is aroused, and the player's desire to play is favorably enhanced.

The addition display DR4 is displayed for a predetermined period, and after the display ends, the production start display DR1 (base display) reflecting the number of reservations RbN and the number of possible additions of the second special symbol at that time is displayed. Is displayed. After that, each time the game round of the second special figure is started, the subtraction indication DR2 is displayed, and each time the storage of the new pending information of the second special figure is generated, the addition indication DR4 is displayed. Through these displays, the player can sequentially know the remaining number of game rounds that have been confirmed to be played, the remaining number of possible additions, and the number of added game rounds.

Then, at timing t5, when the variable display of the final game round in the specific state (the seventh game round after the end of the high-frequency support mode) ends, the effect end display DR5 shown in FIG. 53(d) appears on the display screen G. Is displayed. As a result, the player is informed of the end of the specific state. The effect end display DR5 is displayed for a predetermined period. It should be noted that the effect end display DR5 may be configured to be displayed after the end of the final game round (for example, at the end of the confirmation display).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

At the start timing of the special performance, the progress of the high winning accessory opening/closing game is grasped, and the special performance is executed when it is determined that the opening/closing game will continue after the end of the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the player can understand that the opening/closing control, which has not actually been executed in the opening/closing game, will be performed after the mode is executed by executing the special notification. In this way, if the player can know in advance whether or not it is likely that the player will be able to win a prize in the second operation port 34 after the mode ends, the player will have a sense of anticipation for the development of the game after the mode ends. Not only is it easier to hold, but you can also enjoy the game with the goal of winning a prize. As a result, it is possible to make the game even more lively in which the pending information can be added after the end of the mode, and to favorably increase the player's willingness to play.

Based on the result of grasping the degree of progress, the number of games that can be added after the end of the mode is grasped, and this is notified by a special effect. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp in advance the number of games that can be added after the mode ends. For example, when a large number of play times that can be added is notified, the expectation for the subsequent game is heightened, the mood is lifted, and the game becomes enjoyable. Furthermore, when the number can be grasped in this way, it is possible to expect or aim for the maximum number of additions, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the special performance. .

Based on the result of grasping the progress and the result of grasping the execution period of each special game round whose execution is suspended at the start timing of the production, it is configured to grasp the number of games that can be added after the mode ends. . By grasping the execution period of each game round whose execution is suspended, it is possible to grasp the start timing of each game round whose future execution is confirmed. The start timing of each of these game rounds is the future timing when the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure decreases, so by deriving the number that can be added in consideration of the results of grasping these timings, addition of reservation information It is possible to derive the number of possible additions by excluding winnings (invalid winnings) to the second operation port 34 that are not connected to the . Therefore, it is possible to derive the number of possible additions corresponding to the actual number, and to perform highly reliable notification.

A first image 506 and a second image 507 are displayed in the special performance, and the player can recognize the number of game rounds that can be added and the number of game rounds actually added. These displays can provide the player with information on the target value and the actual value when playing the game with the goal of adding the same number as the number of possible additions, and can also make the player aware of the degree of goal achievement. As a result, it is possible to liven up the game by adding the number of games after the end of the mode, and to improve the amusement.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which performs alert|reporting according to the goal achievement level at the final stage (for example, end screen) of special production|presentation. For example, if the same number of additions as the number that can be added is realized, a notification such as "Very well done" is made, while if the addition is less than that, a notification such as "Good luck next time" is made. configuration. In that case, if the number of additions is less than the number that can be added, but the number of additions exceeds the predetermined number, a medium-level notification such as "Good job" will be given, and if the number of additions is less than the predetermined number, "Next Good luck!

A configuration is adopted in which a special performance is executed after the start of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode. The special effect is related to the situation after the end of the high-frequency support mode, and if such notification is made before the notification of the result of the lottery in the final game round in the mode, the result of the final game round will be lost. It functions as an indication of the result, and there is a concern that the player will find it difficult to expect a winning result in the final game round. In this regard, in this configuration, the special effect is executed after the result of the winning lottery in the final game round is notified, so it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the execution period of the game round of the second special figure is read in advance and the result is used to execute the special effect. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 63. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 55, the variable display time table B of the second special figure for the deviation in the specific state according to the present embodiment will be described.

Comparing the variable display time table B of this embodiment with the variable display time table B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is different in that a plurality of types of variable display time and fixed display time are provided for game times when the value of the number counter area OC is 10 to 17). That is, in the first embodiment, the execution period of each game round after the end of the high-frequency support mode is uniformly set to be 5.5 seconds, but in the present embodiment, the execution period of each game round is set to be 5.5 seconds. It is configured so that the execution period can vary.

Specifically, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, for the 1st to 8th second special figure game rounds, if the fluctuation type counter CS is "0" to "169", 2 sec fluctuation display It is set to select time and a fixed display time of 0.5 sec. Further, when the fluctuation type counter CS is "170" to "189", the fluctuation display time of 5 sec and the fixed display time of 0.5 sec are selected, and the fluctuation type counter CS is "190" to "199". In some cases, a variable display time of 15 seconds and a fixed display time of 0.5 seconds are selected.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for operating port>
Winning processing for the operating port according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this figure, the same step numbers are given to the same processing as the working opening processing of FIG. 20, and the description thereof is omitted.

After executing the setting process of the second hold command in step S212 in the operation port process, the process for hold confirmation is executed in step S3201. The hold confirmation process is based on the hold information of the second special figure that is held and stored. This is to execute so-called pre-reading processing in which determination is made before the data is processed. Here, the hold confirmation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Hold confirmation processing>
In the hold confirmation process, first, in step S3301, the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold storage number area of the hold ball storage area 114b is read, and information on the hold number is stored in the register of the MPU 112. In the following step S3302, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS among the reservation information acquired in step S211 (FIG. 20) are grasped based on the current winning to the second operation port 34.

In the subsequent step S3303, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 ascertained in the above step S3302 corresponds to the big hit or the small hit. Specifically, referring to the success/failure table for the second special figure in FIG. Determine whether or not the

If it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot winning or the small winning, that is, it corresponds to the result of losing, the process proceeds to step S3304, and the hold obtained based on the current winning to the second operation port 34 It is determined whether or not the information corresponds to a game round in a specific state. If it is determined that it corresponds to the game round in the specific state, in step S3305, the variable display time table B shown in FIG. and grasp the fixed display time.

If a negative determination is made in step S3303 or step S3304, the process advances to step S3306 to refer to the other corresponding variable display time table and grasp the variable display time and fixed display time of the game round corresponding to the acquired hold information. do.

After step S3305 or step S3306 is executed, information on the grasped variable display time and fixed display time is stored in the register of the MPU 112 in step S3307. In the following step S3308, a prefetch command is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82, and then this reservation confirmation process is terminated. The look-ahead command is for the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 to specify the read-ahead variable display time and fixed display time. Contains identification information for The look-ahead command set in step S3308 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

In this embodiment, both the variable display time and the fixed display time are read in advance as information corresponding to the execution period of the game round. If it is possible to identify the fixed display time without looking ahead, such as when the fixed display time is uniquely determined from the information, only the variable display time may be looked ahead.

<Special effect processing>
Next, the special effect processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the special effect processing of FIG. 51, and the description thereof is omitted.

If it is determined in step S3006 that it is the start timing of the special effect, the process proceeds to step S3401, and the number of times of the second special figure that can be added after the end of the high-frequency support mode (additional possible reservation number SA) is grasped. Execute the process for Here, the processing for grasping the addable pending number SA will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59 . Since the basic concept of each process in the comprehension process is the same as the case shown in FIG. 52(b), the description will be made with reference to FIG.

In the process of grasping the addable reservation number SA, first, in step S3501, the degree of progress (progress or degree of progress) of the accessory opening/closing game at the production start timing is grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the elapsed period Ta from the timing t1 at which the opening and closing game of the universal electric accessory 34a is started to the timing t2 at which the special effect is started is grasped. In addition, in this step, the grasped elapsed period Ta and the time information of the accessory opening/closing game stored in the ROM 243 of the effect control device 82 (the number of openings of the general electric accessory 34a related to the high frequency accessory opening/closing game, each opening time and information indicating each waiting time, etc.), the elapsed period (period from timing t2 to timing t4) Tc1 from the performance start timing to the start of the first opening after the end of the high-frequency support mode is grasped. When there is a second or subsequent release after the mode ends, the elapsed periods Tc2 and Tc3 from the timing of the start of the presentation to the start of each release are also grasped.

In the following step S3502, 1 is assigned (set) to the variable k. Then, in step S3503, the execution period of the k-th second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode is grasped. This processing is performed by specifying the variable display time and fixed display time of the k-th game round based on the look-ahead command transmitted from the main controller 81 .

The execution period of the k-th game round is the period from the start timing to the end timing of the game round, and these timings are specified in this step. Specifically, first, for the first game round (k=1) of the second special figure after the end of the mode, the variable display time and the fixed display are specified based on the look-ahead command. Then, based on this identification result, as shown in FIG. 52(b), an elapsed period (a period from timing t2 to timing t3) Tb1 from the production start timing to the start of the first game round, and the first Elapsed period (period from timing t2 to timing t5) Tb2 until the game round is completed. In the present embodiment, the special effect is started at the start timing of the confirmation display in the final game round (ninth game round) of the high-frequency support mode. Use fixed display time.

In the subsequent step S3504, it is determined whether or not the general electrical role 34a is released during execution of the k-th game round. This determination is made using the degree of progress of the accessory opening/closing game grasped at step S3501 and the execution period of the k-th game round grasped at step S3503. For example, when the variable k is 1 and the first game round is targeted, the elapsed periods Tc1 to Tc3 grasped in step S3501 are compared with the elapsed periods Tb1 and Tb2 grasped in step S3503, and the elapsed period It is determined whether or not there is one of Tc1 to Tc3 that is longer than the elapsed period Tb1 and shorter than the period Tb2. Then, if such an elapsed period Tc exists, the general electric accessory 34a is released during the execution of the first game round, and conversely, if it does not exist, the first game round is being executed. It is specified that the universal electrical accessory 34a does not open.

If it is determined in step S3504 that the universal electrical accessory 34a is released during execution of the k-th game round, the process proceeds to step S3505, and 1 is added to the value of the addable reservation number SA. After execution of step S3505 or if a negative determination is made in step S3504, the process advances to step S3506 to add 1 to the value of variable k.

In the following step S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable k is greater than the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure. If it is determined that the value of the variable k is equal to or less than the number of reservations RbN, the process returns to step S3503, and the processing of steps S3503 to S3506 is repeated until the value of the variable k becomes greater than the number of reservations RbN. That is, for all of the pending information (holding information of the second special figure) that exists at the start timing of the special effect, whether or not the general electric role 34a is released during the execution of the game round corresponding to each pending information is determined, and the value of the addable pending number SA is updated based on the result. At this time, the elapsed period Tb ascertained in step S3503 is the elapsed period Tb3 (FIG. 52(b)) when k=2, and is the elapsed period Tb4 (FIG. 52(b)) when k=3.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the value of variable k is greater than the number of reservations RbN, the process advances to step S3508 to clear the value of variable k to zero. After that, the process of grasping the addable pending number SA is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special effect processing in FIG. 58, after executing the processing of step S3401, it is determined whether or not the value of the addable reservation number SA is "1" or more in step S3008.

Also, in step S3015 it is determined that an increase in the hold information of the second special figure (addition of hold information) has occurred, and after that, after executing the display processing of the addition display DR4 in step S3016, in step S3402, addition Executes update processing of the number of possible reservations SA. Here, the process of updating the addable pending number SA will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing update processing of the number SA of pending additions, and FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the update processing.

As shown in FIG. 60, first, in step S3601, the degree of progress (degree of progress or degree of progress) of the accessory opening/closing game at the timing when the addition of the pending information occurs is grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, the elapsed period Td1 from the timing t1 at which the opening/closing game of the universal electric accessory 34a is started to the timing t2 at which the reservation information is added is grasped.

In the subsequent step S3602, the end timing of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped. Specifically, the elapsed period Td1 grasped in the above step S3601, and the time information of the accessory opening and closing game stored in the ROM 243 of the production control device 82 (the number of openings of the general electric accessory 34a related to the high frequency accessory opening and closing game, information indicating each opening time and each waiting time), the remaining period (period from timing t2 to timing t4) Td2 in the accessory opening/closing game is grasped.

In the subsequent step S3603, the start timing of the game cycle corresponding to the additional suspension is grasped. Specifically, the elapsed period (period from timing t2 to timing t3) Te1 from the addition timing of the hold information to the start timing of the game round corresponding to the additional hold is grasped. In addition, when the game round of the second special figure is not being executed at the timing of adding the reservation information, the elapsed period Te1 is grasped as 0 sec.

In the subsequent step S3604, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game ends before the game cycle corresponding to the additional hold is started. In this step, the elapsed period Te1 ascertained in step S3603 and the remaining period Td2 ascertained in step S3602 are compared. It is assumed that the object opening/closing game ends, and when the former is smaller than the latter, it is specified that the accessory opening/closing game does not end before the start of the game cycle corresponding to the additional hold.

If it is determined in step S3604 that the opening and closing game of the accessory is completed, the process of updating the addable reservation number SA is completed, while if it is determined that it is not completed, the process proceeds to step S3605, and the game round corresponding to the additional suspension is completed. to understand the execution period of The execution period of the game round corresponding to the additional suspension is the period from the start timing to the end timing of the game round. Grasping processing is performed. Specifically, based on the look-ahead command transmitted from the main control device 81, the variable display time and fixed display time of the game round corresponding to the additional hold are specified, and the game round corresponding to the additional hold is specified from the timing of adding the hold information. The elapsed period (period from timing t2 to timing t6) Te2 until the end timing of .

In the subsequent step S3606, it is determined whether or not the general electrical role 34a is released during execution of the game round corresponding to the additional hold. In this step, first, an elapsed period (period from timing t2 to timing t5) Td3 from the timing of adding the holding information to the timing of opening the universal electrical accessory 34a is grasped. Then, the grasped elapsed period Td3 is compared with the above-described elapsed periods Te1 and Te2, and if the elapsed period Td3 is larger than the elapsed period Te1 and smaller than the period Te2, the general electric function is executed during the game round corresponding to the additional hold. 34a is identified as open.

When it is determined that the universal electrical accessory 34a is opened, the process proceeds to step S3607, and 1 is added to the value of the addable reservation number SA. In subsequent step S3608, display processing of update display DR6 is executed. In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of update display DR6 is output to display control device 212 . The display control device 212 having received the command reads the image data for the update display DR6 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. In addition, it drives and controls the speaker section 64 so as to output a predetermined effect sound. Note that the update display DR6 updates the display of the number of reserves that can be added in the special effect, and the details thereof will be described later. After execution of step S3608 or when a negative determination is made in step S3606, the process of updating the addable pending number SA ends.

Returning to the description of the special effect processing in FIG. 58, after the execution of step S3402, or when negative determination is made in step S3013 or step S3015, the process proceeds to step S3017, whether or not the game round of the second special figure has ended judge.

<About the flow of the special production>
Next, the flow of the special effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the special effect, and FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display example of the special effect. Here, the case where the number of pending RbN of the second special symbol is 3 at the start of the special effect (at the start of the confirmation display of the final game cycle in the high-frequency support mode) will be described as an example.

At timing t1, which is the start timing of the special effect, an effect start display DR1 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁In this case, the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is 3, and it is determined that the game round of the second special figure will be executed three times after the end of the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the hold information held and stored, and grasps the execution period for each of the three game rounds. Then, based on the grasped execution period of each game round and the degree of progress of the accessory opening/closing game at that time, it is determined whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is opened during execution of each game round.

In the example shown in FIG. 62, since the general electrical role 34a is opened during the execution of the first and third game rounds, the number of possible additions is grasped as two. As a result, in the effect start display DR1 displayed at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. An effect display 501 is displayed. In addition, the first image 506 notifying that the number of game rounds of the second special figure whose implementation has been confirmed is 3, and the game round of the second special figure that can be added after the high-frequency support mode ends A second image 507 notifying that the number of times is two is displayed.

At timing t2, when the first game round after the end of the high-frequency support mode is started, the subtraction display DR2 is displayed on the display screen G. In the subtraction display DR2 in this case, as shown in FIG. 63(b), one memory number image H displayed in the first effect display 501 is deleted, and the number display 506a of the first image 506 is replaced. It is updated to "2". Further, in the subtraction display DR2, an execution number display 512 is displayed to notify that it is the first game round after the mode is ended, in other words, that it is the first chance game. Note that the subtraction display DR2 is not displayed only momentarily at the timing t2, but continues to be displayed thereafter as long as there is no need to change the display content during the execution period of the special effect.

After that, at the timing t3, when the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs and the pending information of the new second special figure is stored, the addition display DR4 is displayed on the display screen G. In the addition display DR4 at this time, as shown in FIG. 63(c), one of the two additional number images L displayed in the first effect display 501 changes to the stored number image H. is displayed. Also, the number display 506a of the first image 506 is changed from "2" to "3", and the number display 507a of the second image 507 is displayed to change from "2" to "1". Furthermore, in the addition display DR4, an addition time image 510 is displayed to notify that one game round of the second special figure has been added. This addition display DR4 is displayed for a predetermined period. Such a display notifies the player that the game round of the second special figure has been added.

Further, when the hold information is added, the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the added hold information, and grasps the execution period (timing t4-t5 period) of the game round corresponding to the additional hold. Then, based on the grasped execution period and the degree of progress of the accessory opening/closing game at that time, it is determined whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is opened during the execution of the game round corresponding to the additional hold. In the example shown in FIG. 62, since the general electrical accessory 34a is released during the execution of the additional game round, it is specified that one should be added to the current addable pending number.

On the display screen G, after the display of the addition display DR4 ends, an update display DR6 reflecting the specification of the number of pending additions that can be added is displayed. In the updated display DR in this case, as shown in FIG. 63(d), one additional number image L is added to the first effect display 501, and the number display 507a of the second image 507 is changed to "1. ” to “2”. Also, in the update display DR, for example, a character display such as "stockable number + 1!" By such a display, the player is informed that the number of possible additions has increased, that is, that the number of possible additions has been increased by causing the winning to the second operation opening 34 . As a result, the player's joy is aroused, and the player's desire to play is favorably enhanced.

After the update time image 513 is displayed over a predetermined period, the production start display DR1 (base display) reflecting the number of reservations RbN and the number of additional possible reservations of the second special figure each time is displayed.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it easier to understand the significance of looking ahead to the variable display time of the game round after the mode ends, a plurality of types of variable display times with different lengths are provided, but the above-described second embodiment is used. Even in a configuration in which the variable display time is standardized as in the form of , a configuration in which the variable display time is read in advance and a special effect is executed based on the result thereof may be employed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The execution period of each special game cycle whose execution is suspended at the start timing of the special performance is read in advance, and the addable suspension number SA is grasped based on the result. As a result, even if the execution period of each game cycle is not uniform as in the second embodiment, but is fluid as in the present embodiment, the number of possible additions that conforms to the actual situation can be derived, and highly reliable notification can be performed.

When a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs after the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not it is possible to add new hold information during the execution period of the game round corresponding to the winning. In this case, the configuration is such that the addable pending number SA is updated. In this case, the number of possible additions notified in the special effect (the number of additional number images L of the first effect display 501 and the number display 507a of the second image 507) can increase during the special effect. As a result, the player's joy can be suitably aroused, and the game can be played after the end of the mode in anticipation of an increase in the number of possible additions, and the expectation can be maintained suitably.

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described second and third embodiments in that an effect corresponding to the continuable period of the specific state after the end of the high-frequency support mode is executed. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Special effect processing>
The special effect processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the special effect processing of FIG. 51, and the description thereof is omitted.

In step S3006, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the special effect. In the present embodiment, the start timing of the special effect is the start timing of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode. When it is determined that it is time to start the special effect, the process advances to step S3701 to execute determination processing of the remaining period. Here, the remaining period determination processing in step S3701 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65 and the explanatory diagram of FIG.

In the determination processing of the remaining period, first, in step S3801, the degree of progress (degree of progress or degree of progress) of the accessory opening/closing game at the start timing of the special effect is grasped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, an elapsed period Ta from the timing at which the opening and closing game of the universal electrical accessory 34a is started to the timing at which the special effect is started is grasped.

In the subsequent step S3802, an elapsed period Tm1 (FIG. 66) from the start timing of the special effect to the end timing of the high-frequency support mode is grasped. In the present embodiment, the special effect is started at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is ended at the end of the confirmation display of the final game round. The fixed display time of the last game is used as the elapsed period Tm1.

Next, in step S3803, the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped, and then the remaining period grasping processing is terminated. In this step, the sum (Ta1+Tm1) of the elapsed period Ta1 grasped in step S3801 and the elapsed period Tm2 grasped in step S3802 is subtracted from the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game, and after the end of the high-frequency support mode to derive the remaining period Tm2 of the accessory opening/closing game. During this remaining period Tm2, opening/closing control is executed to switch the general electrical accessory 34a to the open state, and the player can expect to win a prize in the second operation opening 34, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state. However, in addition to being shorter than the high-frequency support mode, the minimum period is not guaranteed like the high-frequency support mode, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the high-frequency support mode. .

When executing step S3803, the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game (required period from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game) is the time information (high-frequency accessory Information indicating the number of times of opening the general electric accessory 34a related to the opening and closing game, each opening time, each waiting time, etc.) is used. In addition, the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game varies depending on the winning status of the second operation port 34, but the execution period in this step is the maximum period (22. 5 sec) is used. Therefore, the period derived as the remaining period Tm2 is not the one in which the continuation of the accessory opening/closing game is guaranteed, but the maximum remaining period that can be executed. Since the opening period and the ending period are short, they are not considered in FIG. 66, but the opening period and the ending period may be included in the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game.

Returning to the description of the special effect processing in FIG. 64, after executing step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3008 to execute the effect start process. In this step, a special effect flag is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 . In the subsequent step S3702, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game continues even after the end of the high-frequency support mode, that is, whether or not the remaining period Tm2 is greater than 0 sec. When it is determined that the accessory opening/closing game will not continue (remaining period Tm2 is 0 sec), this special effect processing is terminated and the special effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory opening/closing game will continue (the remaining period Tm2 is greater than 0 sec), the process proceeds to step S3703 to execute display processing for special effect display. Here, the special effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67 . FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing a display example of a special effect.

In this embodiment, the first effect display 501 is not displayed during the special effect, and only the second effect display 502 is displayed. Then, in the second effect display 502, a predetermined notification 521 corresponding to the length of the remaining period Tm2 ascertained in step S3803 is displayed.

In step S3702 of FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the remaining period Tm2 ascertained in step S3803 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. As the predetermined period, for example, 7.5 sec, which is the period (required period from the start of the third opening to the end of the high winning accessory opening/closing game) during which the game round of the second special figure can be added twice. use. Then, when the remaining period Tm2 is longer than or equal to the predetermined period (when three additions are possible in FIG. 66), as shown in FIG. Control is performed so that the first notification with letters is given. On the other hand, when the remaining period Tm2 is less than the predetermined period (when one passage in FIG. 66 is possible), as shown in FIG. Control is performed so that the attached second notification is performed.

In this step, a command including information indicating the display content of the special effect is output to the display control device 212 . The display control device 212 that has received the command reads the image data for the effect start display DR1 from the character ROM 276 and controls the pattern display device 41 so that the content of the image data is displayed on the display screen G. Further, in step S3702, the voice data for special effect stored in the ROM 243 is read, and the speaker unit 64 is driven and controlled so that, for example, the same words as the characters displayed as the predetermined notification 521 are voice-output.

It should be noted that although this embodiment does not mention the variable display time table regarding the game round of the second special figure in the specific state, the variable display time table of FIG. Table B (unification of the variable display time and fixed display time of the game round of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode) may be used, or as shown in FIG. A variable display time table B (the variable display time and fixed display time of the second special figure game round after the end of the high-frequency support mode may be fluid).

Further, by applying the present embodiment to the second embodiment or the third embodiment, the first effect display 501 is displayed in the special effect, or the second image 507 is displayed together with the predetermined notification 521. or even the first image 506 may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the remaining period Tm2 ascertained in step S3803 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the first notification is uniformly displayed as the predetermined notification 521. However, whether or not to display the first notification lottery process, and the first notification is more likely to be displayed than when the remaining period Tm2 is less than the predetermined period. In this case, the second notification may be performed when the remaining period Tm2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, or the first notification may be performed when the remaining period Tm2 is less than the predetermined period. , or both.

In the present embodiment described in detail above, as in the second embodiment, a special effect is executed when the high winning accessory opening/closing game continues after the end of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the player can understand that the general electric role 34a will be in the open state after the mode ends by executing the special effect, and can face the game with expectation for the development after the mode ends. be possible. Moreover, it is configured to perform notification corresponding to the duration of the high winning accessory opening/closing game after the mode ends. By knowing the length of the duration, the player can grasp or guess the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the mode. You can reach the end of the mode. With the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy the final game of the high-frequency support mode and improve the interest.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode ends at the start timing of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode, and the opening and closing game of the general electric role 34a in the high-frequency support mode is executed. It is different from the above embodiments in that a plurality of types with different periods are provided. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 83. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Processing for special figure confirmation display>
First, the processing for special figure confirmation display executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed in step S409 of the special figure game round control process of FIG. 22, and is executed in place of the special figure confirmation display process of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 68, the same step number is given to the same processing as the special figure confirmation display processing of FIG. 22, and the explanation thereof is omitted or simplified.

In the processing for special figure confirmation display, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the pattern (stop result) is being displayed in the confirmation manner in the display unit 43 for special figure. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start confirmation display. When it is determined that the final display is not being performed, that is, when it is time to start the final display, the final display time setting process is executed in step S802.

Here, an allocation table for selecting a fixed display time, that is, a variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG. Since the variable display time tables other than the variable display time table B of the second special figure for the loss in the specific state are the same as in the above embodiments, only the variable display time table B will be described.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the variation display time table B for loss according to the present embodiment, variation pattern information (variation display time and fixed display time) is set (stored). Of these, the variable display time and fixed display time for the game rounds in which the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is 1 to 8 are shown in the variable display time table B according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 26 ( b)), but the fixed display time of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode, in which the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC is 9, is determined according to the first embodiment. It is 4.5 seconds longer than the variable display time table B concerned. Also, in the variable display time table B according to the present embodiment, the value of the high frequency game number counter area JC is 10 to 15 (1st to 6th second special figures after the end of the high frequency support mode) Game times) are the same as in the variable display time table B according to the first embodiment.

Returning to the description of the special figure confirmation display processing in FIG. is set in the fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d. In continuing step S803, start processing of a fixed display is performed, and after that, it is determined whether the 2nd special figure flag is stored in various flag storage areas 114e of RAM114 in step S4001. The second special figure flag is a flag indicating that the current game round is the second special figure game round.

When it determines with the 2nd special figure flag being stored, it progresses to step S807 and performs the process for completion|finish of high frequency support mode. In the process for ending the high-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 35, the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC (the number of times the second special figure is executed during the high-frequency support mode) is updated, and the It is determined whether or not the value of the counter area JC is "0" (steps S1702 and S1703). Then, when the value of the counter area JC is "0", that is, when it is the start timing of the confirmation display in the final game round (ninth game round), various flags stored in the RAM 114 are stored in the flag storage area 114e. The high-frequency support flag is erased, and the high-frequency support mode is terminated (step S1704). That is, in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is terminated (the support mode is shifted to the low-frequency support mode) at the start timing of the confirmation display.

After performing the process of step S807 of FIG. 68, it progresses to step S4002 and performs the process which clears (deletes) the 2nd special figure flag stored in the said various flag storage area 114e.

Next, various counters for performing various lotteries by the MPU 112 of the main control unit 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of accessory opening and closing games are set as the accessory opening and closing games (high winning accessory opening and closing games) of the general electric accessory 34a during the high frequency support mode. An opening type counter C5 is provided as a random number for selecting one accessory opening/closing game from among these.

The release type counter C5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The open type counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric work holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35.例文帳に追加

The allocation destination of the game result (accessory opening/closing game) for the open type counter C5 is stored in the allocation table storage area of the ROM 113 as an open type table for normal figure. Here, the contents of the open type table for normal maps will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 71 . As release type tables, release type table A (FIG. 71(a)) and release type table B (FIG. 71(b)) are provided. The release type table A is referred to when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and the release type table B is referred to when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In the opening type table A for the low-frequency support mode, as shown in FIG. 71(a), "0" to "99" correspond to the low winning accessory opening/closing game. That is, in the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, when the open result (general figure hit) is obtained in the general figure success/failure lottery, the general electric role 34a is always opened and closed in the low winning role opening/closing game. As shown in FIG. 18(a), in the low winning accessory opening and closing game, the opening period of the general electrical accessory 34a in one opening is extremely short (specifically, it is shorter than the game ball firing cycle). ), the opening/closing mode is such that the winning to the second operation opening 34 is hardly expected.

As shown in FIG. 71(b), in the open type table B for the high frequency support mode, "0" to "74" correspond to the first high winning accessories opening and closing game, and "75" to "89" correspond to the opening and closing game. Corresponding to the second high prize opening and closing game, "90" to "99" correspond to the third high prize opening and closing game. In both cases, the opening period of the general electrical role 34a in one opening is longer than in the case of the low winning role opening and closing game (specifically longer than the game ball firing cycle), and the second operation The opening/closing mode is such that winning to the mouth 34 is likely to occur.

Here, various high winning accessory opening/closing games will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 72(a), in the first high winning accessory opening/closing game, opening/closing control of the general electric accessory 34a is performed twice from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game. The opening time in this case is set to 1 sec. In addition, the standby time between each opening is set to 1 sec, and the execution period of the accessory opening/closing game (the period from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game) is 3 seconds. That is, the execution period of the first high winning accessory opening/closing game is shorter than the fixed display time (4.5 sec) of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, the opening time and waiting time in the first high winning accessory opening and closing game are not limited to the above, and the second operation opening 34 is easily opened (longer than the game ball firing cycle). is at least once and its execution period is shorter than the fixed display time of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), in the second high winning accessory opening/closing game, the opening/closing control is set to be executed four times from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game. The first opening/closing control is a combination of opening for 2 seconds and closing (standby) for 1 second, so that the opening/closing pattern is different from the first opening/closing control of the first high winning accessory opening/closing game. is set to The remaining opening times of the second to fourth openings and the standby time of each time are all 1 sec. The execution period of the second high winning accessory opening/closing game is 8 seconds, which is longer than the fixed display time of the final game round in the high frequency support mode.

It should be noted that the opening time and waiting time in the second high winning accessory opening and closing game are not limited to the above, and there is at least one opening at which the second operation opening 34 is likely to win, and the execution period is longer than the fixed display time of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), in the third high winning accessory opening/closing game, the opening/closing control is set to be executed six times from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game. The first open/close control is a combination of opening for 0.5 sec and closing (standby) for 2.5 sec, and the first high prize prize opening and closing game and the second high prize prize opening and closing game. The opening/closing pattern is set to be different from the first opening/closing control of each. The remaining opening times of the second to sixth openings and the standby time of each time are all 1 sec. The execution period of the third high winning accessory opening/closing game is 12 seconds, which is longer than the fixed display time of the final game cycle in the high frequency support mode and longer than the execution period of the second high winning accessory opening/closing game. there is

It should be noted that the opening time and standby time in the third high winning accessory opening and closing game are not limited to the above, and there is at least one time when the second operation opening 34 is likely to win, and the execution period is longer than that of the second accessory opening/closing game, it is arbitrary.

In addition, although the opening period and the ending period are set to 0 sec for convenience in each of the above high prize opening and closing games, they may be longer than 0 sec as long as the above conditions are satisfied for each of the high prize opening and closing games.

The selection probability of each high winning accessory opening/closing game in the opening type table B for the high frequency support mode of FIG. 71(b) is 75% for the first high winning accessory opening/closing game, and the second high winning accessory opening/closing game The game accounted for 15%, and the third winning accessory opening and closing game accounted for 10%. That is, the first high winning accessory opening/closing game is the most likely to be selected, and the third high winning accessory opening/closing game is the least likely to be selected. Note that each of the above selection probabilities is merely an example, and other probabilities may be used.

The distribution processing of the accessory opening and closing game is executed in the stop result setting processing for the high winning accessory opening and closing game in step S2207 of the normal figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 39). In step S2207, the open type table B (FIG. 71(b)) for the high frequency support mode is referred to, and the accessory opening/closing game corresponding to the obtained open type counter C5 is selected. Then, a flag corresponding to the type of the selected accessory opening/closing game is stored in the flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. For example, if the selected accessory opening/closing game is the first high winning accessory opening/closing game, the first high winning accessory opening/closing flag is stored.

Further, in step S2207, the stop result for the high winning accessory opening/closing game is set based on the distribution result of the accessory opening/closing game or the open type counter C5. This processing is to set the stop result for the opening result (normal pattern hit) for the pattern in the normal pattern display unit 44, and the set stop result corresponds to the type of the distributed accessory opening and closing game. It is a thing. In this sense, the open type counter C5 can be said to be a normal pattern winning pattern counter for drawing the stopping result of the pattern in the normal pattern display section 44 . The pattern stop result may be configured such that one type of stop result corresponds to one accessory opening/closing game (opening type), or a configuration in which a plurality of types of stop results correspond. In addition, the first special figure and the second special figure may be configured to share the stop result, but in order to improve the distinguishability between the special figure and the normal figure, A non-overlapping configuration is preferred.

Also, after executing the stop result setting process for the general pattern as described above, the general pattern type command including the information on the presence or absence of the general pattern correctness and the distribution result of the opening and closing game of the role product is sent to the production control device 82 Set as a transmission target. The set normal figure classification command is transmitted to the production control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

<General game state transition processing>
Next, normal figure game state transition processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this figure, the same step numbers are attached to the same processing as the normal game state transition processing of FIG. 41, and the description thereof is omitted.

If it is determined in step S2305 that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the flow advances to step S4101 to determine whether or not the current accessory opening/closing game is the first high winning accessory opening/closing game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 stores the first high winning accessory opening/closing flag. The first high winning accessory opening/closing flag indicates that the current accessory opening/closing game is the first high winning accessory opening/closing game. setting processing), and is erased when the accessory opening/closing game ends.

If it is determined that the current accessory opening/closing game is the first high winning accessory opening/closing game, the process proceeds to step S4102, and "2" is set in the opening/closing control counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. set. The opening/closing control counter area RC2 is for counting the number of times opening/closing control is executed to change the general electric accessory 34a from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process advances to step S4103 to determine whether or not the current accessory opening/closing game is the second high winning accessory opening/closing game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second high winning accessory open/close flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. The second high winning accessory opening/closing flag indicates that the current accessory opening/closing game is the second high winning accessory opening/closing game.

When it is determined that the current accessory opening/closing game is the second high winning accessory opening/closing game, the process proceeds to step S4104, and "4" is set in the opening/closing control counter area RC2. In addition, when it is determined that the current accessory opening/closing game is not the second high winning accessory opening/closing game, it means that the current accessory opening/closing game is the third high winning accessory opening/closing game. , the process advances to step S4105 to set "6" in the opening/closing control counter area RC2.

After execution of step S2306, step S4102, step S4104 or step S4105, the setting process of the normal figure opening command is performed in step S2308.

Moreover, when it determines with the opening period having passed by step S2310, a role opening and closing process is performed in step S4106. Here, the accessory opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this figure, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processing as the accessory opening/closing control in FIG. 42, and the description thereof is omitted.

After executing the accessory opening process of step S2404, the setting process for each opening/closing control is executed in step S4201. As shown in FIG. 75, in the setting process for each opening/closing control, first, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not a high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 or not.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the process advances to step S4302 to set "100" (equivalent to 0.2 sec) to the third timer counter area TC3 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4303, and it is determined whether or not the current accessory opening/closing game is the second high winning accessory opening/closing game. If it is determined to be the second high winning role opening/closing game, in step S4304, whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "3", that is, the second high winning role opening/closing game is executed. It is determined whether or not it is the first opening timing in . If it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "3", "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set to the third timer counter area TC3 in step S4305.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S4303 (determined that the current accessory opening and closing game is not the second high winning accessory opening and closing game), the process proceeds to step S4306, and the current accessory opening and closing game is the third high winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is an object opening/closing game. If it is determined to be the third high winning role opening/closing game, it is checked in step S4307 whether the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "6", that is, the third high winning role opening/closing game. It is determined whether or not it is the first opening timing in . If it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "6", "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set to the third timer counter area TC3 in step S4308.

If a negative determination is made in step S4306, step S4307 or step S4304, the process advances to step S4309 to set "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) in the third timer counter area TC3.

After step S4302, step S4305, step S4308 or step S4309 is executed, in step S4310, the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is set to "10", and then the setting processing for each opening/closing control ends.

Returning to the description of the role product opening and closing process in FIG. 74, after the execution of step S4201, the normal figure open command setting process is executed in step S2406.

Also, if it is determined in step S2413 that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, the winning number of game balls to the second operation opening 34 is one of the termination conditions of the accessory opening/closing game. If it is determined that the upper limit winning number (10) has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S4202 to determine whether or not the current accessory opening/closing game is the third high winning accessory opening/closing game. When it is determined to be the third high winning role opening/closing game, in step S4203, whether or not the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "5", that is, the third high winning role opening/closing game It is determined whether or not it is time to start waiting for the first time. If it is determined that the value of the opening/closing control counter area RC2 is "5", the process advances to step S4204 to set "1250" (corresponding to 2.5 sec) to the third timer counter area TC3.

If a negative determination is made in step S4202 or step S4203, the process advances to step S4205 to set "500" (corresponding to 1 sec) in the third timer counter area TC3. After execution of step S4204 or step S4205 progresses to step S2416, and performs the setting process of the normal figure close command.

<Futsu-zu game performance>
Next, the general pattern game round effect executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device, FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing normal pattern variation display control processing, and FIG. (b) is a flow chart showing the process for starting normal pattern fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 76, each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in the display screen G and an area that does not overlap with the reserved display areas Ga, Gb, more specifically in the upper part of the display screen G, the variable display of the normal game round A normal map display area P is set as the area. The normal figure display area P is composed of a plurality of (two) display portions, and a variable display is possible by switching the display color in each of these display portions. In addition, the general pattern display area P is smaller than the variable display area in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each display portion in the general pattern display area P is smaller than each pattern (main pattern and sub pattern).

The normal map display area P corresponds to the normal map display unit 44, and when the normal map display unit 44 performs a variable display, the normal map display area P also performs a variable display. Then, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed in the normal pattern display area P together with the normal pattern display section 44 .

The variable display of the normal pattern game round effect on the display screen G is performed by switching the display colors of the two display portions in the normal pattern display area P. For example, as shown in FIG. 78 (a1), the display color of the two display units is the same or substantially the same first display color (for example, white) when the normal figure game round is started, As shown in FIG. 78(a2), the display color of one of the display units is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) that is different from the previous color (the difference in color of the display units is hatched in the figure). are displayed differently depending on the After that, as shown in FIG. 78(a3), the color of the display section switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display section is changed to the first display color. to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 78(a4), the color of each display is switched again. The variable display of the normal game round is basically repeated switching of the display colors of these two display units (Fig. 78 (a2) → Fig. 78 (a3) → Fig. 78 (a4) → Fig. 78 (a2) repetition). This display color switching is set to make one round in about 0.5 sec, making it difficult for the player to distinguish the respective displays before and after switching.

When the variable display time of the normal game round production has passed, it is notified whether the opening result of shifting to the opening and closing game of the role product or the disconnection result is performed as the game result of the normal game round production. In the case of the open result, as shown in FIG. 78(a5), both of the two display portions become the second display color, and the variable display ends. This stop display is continued over a period (determined display time) during which the normal pattern is stop-displayed on the display unit 44 for the normal pattern.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of kinds of opening and closing games consisting of low prize opening and closing games and first to third high prize opening and closing games are provided as types of the opening and closing games. In the general pattern game round effect in the area P, the same stop result (hit pattern) is stop-displayed even when any of these accessory opening and closing games is executed. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the normal pattern display area P, it is possible to identify that the normal pattern is being displayed in a variable display, that the normal pattern is being displayed as a fixed display, and whether or not there is an opening result. In the case of the result, it is not possible to identify in which accessory opening/closing game the general electric accessory 34a is controlled to be opened/closed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the interest of guessing in what manner the universal electrical accessory 34a is controlled to be opened/closed.

On the other hand, in the regular game round executed by the regular figure display unit 44, a stop result corresponding to the type of the accessory opening/closing game is displayed, as described above. Since the display unit 44 for the normal figure is away from the central portion of the game board 24 and is less conspicuous, it is assumed that even with such a configuration, the possibility that the above-described amusement is hindered is low. In addition, by stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the type of the accessory opening/closing game on the general-purpose display unit 44, there is an effect that it is possible to contribute to the early detection of fraud. For example, even though the actual result of the internal lottery is not a high winning accessory opening/closing game, an act of operating the general electric accessory 34a in the mode of a high winning accessory opening/closing game has been performed due to some kind of fraud. In this case, the employee of the game hall can find out that the actual result of the internal lottery does not match the operation of the general electric accessory 34a by looking at the general map display unit 44.

On the other hand, if the result of the normal figure lottery is a result of losing, as shown in FIG. ends. In addition, the stop result corresponding to the out-of-match result is also stopped and displayed on the normal map display unit 44 .

<Normal map fluctuation display control processing>
Next, as a process related to the general-purpose game round production of the general-purpose display area P, the general-purpose variation display control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77 . This processing is executed as part of regular processing started by the MPU 242 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

In the general pattern fluctuation display control process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the general pattern game round is being executed. If it is determined that the general pattern game round is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S4402, and it is determined whether or not the general pattern variation command (step S2210 in FIG. 39) is received from the main control device 81. If it is determined that it has not received the normal figure fluctuation command, while ending this normal figure fluctuation display control process, if it is determined that it has received the normal figure fluctuation command, the normal figure display area In order to start the normal pattern game round production at P, the normal pattern fluctuation start processing of step S4403 is executed. Here, the processing for normal pattern fluctuation start will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78(b).

In the general pattern fluctuation start processing, first, in step S4501, based on the general pattern fluctuation command from the main control device 81, the fluctuation display time in the general pattern game round of this time is grasped. In addition, in step S4501, based on the general pattern type command from the main control device 81, it is determined whether the result of the general pattern success or failure lottery is the open result (normal pattern per result). In addition, as already explained in the general figure game round production in the general figure display area P, since the stop result according to the type of the opening and closing game is not necessarily displayed, from the general figure type command to the type of the opening and closing game Although it is not necessary to specify, for example, different effects depending on the type of opening and closing game (for example, different background images are displayed on the display screen G and the normal figure display area P) When executing this step, It is preferable to specify the type of the accessory opening and closing game.

In the following step S4502, based on the winning result grasped in step S4501, the process of setting the stop result in the normal figure game round production of this time is executed. That is, if the information specified in step S4501 is the open result, the stop result is set so that the two display units are stopped and displayed in the second display color. sets the stop result to stop display of the two displays in the first display color. In addition, the setting of the stop result can be performed after the start of the normal game round production until the fluctuation display time elapses (until the confirmation display is started), so the configuration to be set after the start of the normal game round production may be

In the following step S4503, after executing the process of outputting a command to the display control device 212 so as to start the general pattern game round effect, the normal pattern variation start processing is terminated. Based on the received command, the MPU 272 of the display control device 212 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the general pattern game round effect is started in the general pattern display area P.

Returning to the description of FIG. 77, if the affirmative determination is made in step S4401 (determined that the normal game round is being executed), the process proceeds to step S4404, and it is determined whether or not the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed. This determination is, the MPU242 to measure the elapsed time from the start of the general pattern game round production (or to receive the normal pattern variation command), and the normal pattern game round specified in the above step S4501 the elapsed time This is done by determining whether or not the variable display time of has reached. When it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4405, the normal pattern fluctuation process is executed, and then the normal pattern fluctuation display control process is terminated. In the process for changing the normal pattern, the display of the pattern display device 41 is controlled so that the switching of the display colors of the two display units in the normal pattern display area P is repeated.

When the negative determination is made in step S4404, the process proceeds to step S4406, and the process for general pattern confirmation display is executed. In the general pattern determination display processing, the stop display of the general pattern display area P is started so that the display part of the general pattern display area P is displayed with the stop result set in step S4502 of FIG. It continues until the fixed display time of the normal game round passes. After execution of step S4406, this normal figure fluctuation display control processing is ended.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game at the end of the high frequency support mode and after the end will be described.

As in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode, the end timing of the high-frequency support mode and after the end of the mode The start timing of the game round of the first second special figure is the same. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode ends at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round, the first second support mode is delayed by the confirmation display time from the end of the high-frequency support mode. A game round of a special figure will be started. That is, after the end of the mode, until the game round of the first second special figure is started (in other words, after the end of the mode, until the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure first decreases) , a grace period of length corresponding to the fixed display time occurs. In the present embodiment, this grace period is utilized to vary the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode.

First, the case where the high-frequency support mode ends during the variable display of the pattern of the normal game cycle will be described with reference to FIG. 79 .

At the timing t1 during the high-frequency support mode, when the accessory opening and closing game that has been executed until then ends, one general pattern reservation memory is consumed, the general pattern success or failure lottery is executed, and the general pattern game round is performed. be started. In this case, it is assumed that the result of the lottery is the open result.

After that, before the variable display of the pattern of the normal game round ends, the variable display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode (9th second special game round) ends, and the fixed display is started. , the high-frequency support mode ends. In this case, the result of the success or failure lottery of the normal game round started at the timing t1 is changed to the result of losing. As a result, even if the normal game cycle ends at timing t3 after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the normal electric accessory 34a is not released.

In addition, with the end of the general pattern game round at the timing t3, the next general pattern game round is started, but this game round is after the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the variable display time is long (for example, 30 sec), and the winning probability of the general pattern success or failure lottery is lower than in the high frequency support mode. For this reason, it is difficult to expect that the general electric accessory 34a will be in the open state before the number of reserved memories of the second special figure becomes zero. Even if the result of the winning lottery is an open result, the general electric accessory 34a is controlled to open and close in the low winning accessory opening and closing game (Fig. 18 (a)), so the winning to the second operation port 34 is not possible. Not expected.

As a result of the above, even if the first game round (the second special game round) after the end of the mode is started and there is an empty space in the reserved memory of the second special round, the game ball is placed in the second operation port 34. It is not possible to add a second special game round without winning a prize.

Next, referring to FIG. 80, the case where the first high winning accessory opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode will be described. Here, the case where the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the normal game round will be described as an example.

At the timing t1, when the variable display of the ninth second special figure game round ends and the fixed display starts, the high-frequency support mode ends. After that, the special figure stop result stop-displayed by the start of the confirmation display is continuously displayed until the timing t4 when the confirmation display time (4.5 sec) elapses.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal game round ends at the timing t1, the normal pattern stop result is stopped and displayed over the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the normal pattern, and then it is the end timing of the stop display. At the timing t2, the first high winning accessory opening/closing game of the general electrical accessory 34a is started. This first high winning accessory opening/closing game is continued until 3 sec, which is its execution period, elapses (timing t3).

Here, the period TA2 (3 sec), which is the execution period of the accessory opening and closing game, is from the fixed display time (4.5 sec) in the final game round of the second special figure to the fixed display time (0.5 sec) in the normal game round. is shorter than the period TA1 (4 sec). Therefore, the first high winning opening/closing game does not continue beyond the fixed display time (grace period), and is absorbed within the fixed display time (grace period). That is, after the first high winning accessory opening and closing game is completed, the first (first) second special figure game round after the mode ends is started (timing t3, timing t4), and the game round The remaining opening of the accessory opening and closing game does not occur after the start of. Therefore, even if the reservation number RbN of the second special figure is reduced by the start of the first game cycle, and the second special figure display unit reservation area Rb becomes empty, the game ball wins the second operation port 34. Without doing so, it is not possible to add the game round of the second special figure.

By the way, since the special game round and the normal game round are performed independently and progress asynchronously, as shown in the example shown in FIG. It is rare that the timing matches, rather, as shown in FIG. Most of them are Even in that case, the example shown in FIG. 80 is the timing at which the start of the general pattern game round is the most delayed as the result of the general pattern success or failure lottery in the high frequency support mode is valid, so the opening and closing game of the accessory Although the end timing of is earlier than the illustrated timing, it is not further delayed. Therefore, when the first high winning accessory opening and closing game is executed at the end of the high-frequency support mode, no matter how the phase between the special figure game time and the normal figure game time is shifted, after the mode ends The accessory opening/closing game is not continued until after the start of the first game round, and the game round of the second special figure cannot be added.

Then, when the result of the normal figure success or failure lottery in the high-frequency support mode is an open result, the probability that the first high winning accessory opening and closing game is selected as the type of the accessory opening and closing game is the highest (Fig. 71 (b)). For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is basically impossible to add the game round of the second special figure after the mode ends.

By the way, when the number of reservations RbN of the second special diagram at the end of the high-frequency support mode is less than the upper limit number, it is possible to replenish the reserved storage of the second special diagram in the period TA2. In other words, the execution period of the finalized display in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode (the waiting period until the first game round after the mode ends) is the last to earn the number of times the game round of the second special figure is executed. It's a chance.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, the case where the second high winning accessory opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode will be described. In order to facilitate comparison with the case of FIG. 80, a case where the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the normal game cycle will be described as an example.

When the variation display of the ninth second special figure game round ends at timing t1, the high frequency support mode ends, and then the second special figure until timing t3 when the fixed display time (4.5 sec) elapses Stop results continue to be displayed.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal game round ends at the timing t1, the normal pattern stop result is stopped and displayed over the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the normal pattern, and then it is the end timing of the stop display. At the timing t2, the second high winning accessory opening/closing game of the general electrical accessory 34a is started. This second high winning accessory opening/closing game is continued until the execution period of 8 seconds elapses (timing t4).

Here, the period TA2 (8 sec), which is the execution period of the second high winning accessory opening and closing game, is the fixed display time (4.5 sec) in the final game round of the second special figure to the fixed display time in the normal game round ( 0.5 sec) is subtracted, which is longer than the period TA1 (4 sec). For this reason, the second high winning accessory opening/closing game cannot be completely absorbed within the fixed display time (grace period), and the second high winning accessory opening/closing game can continue even after the fixed display time elapses. That is, after the first (first) second special figure game round is started after the end of the mode, and a vacancy occurs in the second special figure display section reservation area Rb, the remainder of the second high winning accessory opening and closing game Release will occur.

In addition, the period TA2 is shorter than the period TA3 (9.5 sec) from the timing t2 to the start of the second game round (second special figure game round) after the end of the mode. The accessory opening/closing game does not continue until after the start of the game cycle. Therefore, when the second high winning accessory opening and closing game is executed at the end of the high-frequency support mode, after the mode ends, after the start of the second special figure game round, the second special figure game round is played once. can be added.

In the example shown in FIG. 82, as in the example shown in FIG. 80, the result of the general pattern winning lottery in the high frequency support mode is valid, and the start of the general pattern game round is the most delayed. It has become. For this reason, in the actual game, when the phase of the second special game cycle and the general pattern game cycle (the character object opening and closing game of the general electric character object 34a) is out of phase, the end timing of the character object opening and closing game is the timing shown in the figure. It may be sooner than later, but never later. That is, when the second high winning accessory opening/closing game is selected as the accessory opening/closing game at the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to add at most one second special figure game.

In this way, the execution of the second high winning accessory opening/closing game at the end of the high-frequency support mode is more advantageous to the player than the case where the first high winning accessory opening/closing game is performed. In this case, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the first opening of the second high winning accessory opening and closing game is made different from that of the first high winning accessory opening and closing game, and the opening time of the general electric accessory 34a in one opening and closing control The opening/closing pattern is made different between the second high winning accessory opening/closing game and the first high winning accessory opening/closing game. Therefore, by visually recognizing the behavior of the general electric role 34a, the player identifies whether the first high winning role opening/closing game is executed or the second high winning role opening game is executed. be able to. That is, it is possible to provide the fun of determining or estimating the type of the accessory opening/closing game from the behavior of the general electric accessory 34a, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In that case, the player specifies the beginning of the accessory opening/closing game, whether the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a is due to the standby state during the accessory opening/closing game, or whether it is due to the execution of the normal figure game. However, in the present embodiment, since the display area P is provided, the above identification can be easily performed by visually recognizing the area P. become. In that case, the stop result displayed in the display area P is common to the first high-winning accessory opening/closing game and the second high-winning accessory opening/closing game. cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the loss of the interest of determining the type of the opening/closing game by the player visually recognizing the display area P and determining from the behavior of the general electric role 34a.

Next, referring to FIG. 83, the case where the second high winning accessory opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high frequency support mode will be described. In order to facilitate comparison with the cases of FIGS. 80 and 82, the case where the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the regular game cycle will be described as an example.

When the variation display of the ninth second special figure game round ends at timing t1, the high frequency support mode ends, and then the special figure stop result stops until timing t3 when the fixed display time (4.5 sec) elapses. continue to be displayed.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal game round ends at the timing t1, the normal pattern stop result is stopped and displayed over the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the normal pattern, and then it is the end timing of the stop display. At the timing t2, the third high winning accessory opening/closing game of the general electric accessory 34a is started. This third high winning accessory opening/closing game is continued until 12 sec, which is its execution period, elapses (timing t4).

On the other hand, since the execution period of the second special game cycle after the mode ends is 5.5 seconds (excluding the case of winning a jackpot or a small win), the second game cycle after the mode ends is started. is the timing t3 after 9.5 seconds have elapsed from the timing t2. Therefore, the accessory opening/closing game continues not only after the first game round is started but also after the second game round is started. That is, the period TA2 (12 sec), which is the execution period of the third high winning accessory opening/closing game, is from the timing t2 to the start of the second game round (second special figure game round) after the end of the mode. Since it is longer than the period TA3 (9.5 sec), the remaining opening of the second high winning accessory opening/closing game is carried out in each of the first game round and the second game round.

In addition, the period TA2 is shorter than the period TA4 (14 sec) from the timing t2 to the start of the third game round (second special figure game round) after the end of the mode, so the third game The accessory opening/closing game does not continue until after the start of the turn. Therefore, when the third high winning accessory opening and closing game is executed at the end of the high-frequency support mode, after the mode ends, after the game round of the second special figure starts, the game round of the second special figure is played twice. can be added.

Also in this case, in the actual game, the phase of the second special figure game round and the general figure game round (the role item opening and closing game of the general electric role item 34a) is out of phase, and the end timing of the accessory opening and closing game is shown in the figure. Even if it is earlier than the timing, it is not later than the timing. That is, when the third high winning accessory opening/closing game is selected as the accessory opening/closing game at the end of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to add the game round of the second special figure up to two times.

In addition, the opening time of the first opening and the closing time of the first standby of the third high winning accessory opening and closing game are made different from those of the first and second high winning accessory opening and closing games, and the general electric power in one opening and closing control The opening/closing pattern of the accessory 34a is made different from other high winning accessory opening/closing games. Therefore, it is possible to impart the interest of determining or estimating the type of the accessory opening/closing game from the behavior of the general electric accessory 34a.

82 and 83 illustrate the case where the second high winning accessory opening/closing game or the third high winning accessory opening/closing game is executed at the end of the high-frequency support mode, but these accessory opening/closing games It may also be executed during high frequency support mode. In this regard, the waiting time of the second and third high winning accessory opening/closing games is shorter than that of the second opening/closing pattern according to the first embodiment, and winning to the second operation opening 34 is more likely to occur. Therefore, even if these accessory opening/closing games are executed in the middle of the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to play the game without reducing the number of balls in hand too much.

In addition, any of the second to fourth embodiments is applied to this embodiment, and after the mode ends, the game round of the second special figure that can be added after the game round of the second special figure is started , or may be configured to perform notification corresponding to the continuation period of the accessory opening/closing game after the end of the mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The high-frequency support mode is terminated at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round, and the first game round of the mode is started after the confirmation display time elapses from the end of the mode. In addition, the accessory opening/closing game can be executed across the end of the mode, and furthermore, the aspect of the accessory opening/closing game that is performed during the mode has an executable period longer than the fixed display time. A long specific mode (second high winning accessory opening and closing game and third high winning accessory opening and closing game) is included.

In this case, the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game becomes the timing at which the accessory opening/closing game is performed across the end of the mode, and the specific mode is performed as the aspect of the accessory opening/closing game at that time. For example, the remaining opening/closing control of the accessory opening/closing game can be generated after the start of the first game cycle. Therefore, it is possible to generate a winning prize to the second operation opening 34 in a state in which the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is reduced, and it is possible to add reservation information (and game times). As a result, even though the high-frequency support mode has ended internally, it is equivalent to extending the mode until after the start of the first game round, and the player's expectation even after the mode ends. It is possible to continue playing the game.

The aspect of the accessory opening/closing game executed during the high-frequency support mode further includes the first high winning accessory opening/closing game whose executable period is shorter than the fixed display time.

In this case, even if the accessory opening/closing game is executed so as to straddle the ending time of the mode, the accessory opening/closing game ends before the start of the first game round in the case of the first high winning accessory opening/closing game. Then, after the start of the game cycle, the general electric accessory 34a is not opened. In other words, in order to enable the addition of hold information, not only the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game but also the type of the accessory opening/closing game at that time is required, and the luck of the player is reflected more strongly. . As a result, the player's sense of accomplishment and joy when the addition of the pending information is successfully achieved is enhanced, and it is possible to favorably enhance the interest.

In addition, in the above configuration, except for the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game, it is possible to intentionally generate a state in which the reservation information can be added after the mode ends by the control of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加By adjusting the selection ratio of each period in the development or design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to install a function that enables the addition of hold information after the mode ends while maintaining the profit balance with the game hall, and the actual operation. A more preferable configuration can be obtained.

As the accessory opening/closing game in the high-frequency support mode, the first high winning accessory opening/closing game is more likely to be selected than the specific mode. In this case, the percentage of cases in which pending information cannot be added increases, so the value of an event that allows pending information to be added can be increased. This enhances the player's sense of superiority and accomplishment when the addition is achieved, and makes it possible to favorably increase the player's desire to play.

The pattern of opening and closing control is made different between the first high winning accessory opening and closing game and the specific mode. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to guess in which mode the accessory opening/closing game being executed is by watching the movement of the universal electrical accessory 34a. As a result, it is possible to add the fun of guessing whether or not it is possible to add the pending information from the behavior of the universal electrical accessory 34a.

In the above specific mode, except for the first waiting time of the third high winning accessory opening and closing game, the waiting time between each opening is set to be less than twice the game ball shooting cycle.

There is a possibility that the opening and closing game of the specific mode is performed not only at the end of the high-frequency support mode, but also at the beginning and middle of the mode. In such a situation, since the length of the waiting time is less than twice the firing cycle of the game ball, during the waiting time of the opening and closing game of the specific mode, two game balls are consecutively placed in the second operation opening. 34 can be suppressed. As a result, even if the opening and closing game of the specific mode is executed in the mode, the rapid decrease of the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is suppressed, and the original gameplay of the mode is hindered. can be suppressed.

It should be noted that it is not necessary that all the waiting times are twice or less than the shooting period of the game balls, and that at least one waiting period should be twice or less than the shooting period.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the high-frequency support mode ends at the start timing of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode, and a plurality of types of confirmation display with different lengths in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode This differs from each of the above embodiments in that time is provided. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the accessory opening/closing game of the universal electrical accessory 34a according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing game of the common electric accessory 34a in the high frequency support mode is only the third high prize opening and closing game, as shown in FIG. 84(b). The execution period of the third high winning accessory opening/closing game (the period from the start of the first opening/closing control to the end of the final opening/closing control) is 12 seconds (see FIG. 72(c)).

Next, the variable display time table B (variable display time table of the second special figure for failure in the specific state) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84(a).

In the variable display time table B of the present embodiment, the value of the specific game number counter area OC is "9" for the game round of the second special figure, that is, the final game round of the high frequency support mode, a plurality of fixed displays The time is set (stored). One of the plurality of fixed display times is selected based on the acquired variation type counter CS. Since the fixed display time is stored together with the variable display time, it is selected together with the variable display time based on the variable type counter CS.

Specifically, when the variation type counter CS is "0" to "149", the variation display time of 30 sec and the fixed display time of 15 sec are selected, and the variation type counter CS is "150" to "179". , a variable display time of 30 seconds and a fixed display time of 9 seconds are selected. Further, when the fluctuation type counter CS is "180" to "199", a fluctuation display time of 30 sec and a fixed display time of 4.5 sec are selected. That is, in the present embodiment, the grace period according to the fifth embodiment is not standardized, but varies among three types of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec.

The variable display time and fixed display time when the value of the specific number-of-games counter area OC is "1" to "8" and "10" to "15" are the variable display table B shown in FIG. is the same as for

The variable display time table B of FIG. 84(a) is referred to in step S705 in the special figure variable display time setting process of FIG. 25, and the variable display time and the fixed display time are selected. In addition, when selecting the variable display time and the fixed display time, the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure at that time is not referred to (the so-called time saving function is not activated).

<About the game flow>
The flow of the game at the end of the high-frequency support mode and after the end will be described. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the case where the high-frequency support mode ends at the end of the variable display of the normal game cycle will be described as an example.

First, the case where the fixed display time of 15 seconds is selected in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG.

At the timing t1, when the variable display of the ninth second special figure game round ends and the fixed display starts, the high-frequency support mode ends. After that, the special figure stop result stop-displayed by the start of the confirmation display is continuously displayed until the timing t4 when the confirmation display time (15 sec) elapses.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal game round ends at the timing t1, the normal pattern stop result is stopped and displayed over the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the normal pattern, and then it is the end timing of the stop display. At the timing t2, the third high winning accessory opening/closing game of the general electric accessory 34a is started. This third high winning accessory opening/closing game is continued until 12 sec, which is its execution period, elapses (timing t3).

On the other hand, the first game round of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode is started at the timing t4 when the confirmation display of the final game round ends, and this timing is the third high winning accessory. It is later than the timing t3 which is the end timing of the opening/closing game. In other words, the third high winning accessory opening/closing game ends before the first second special figure game round after the mode ends.

That is, the period TA5 (15 sec), which is the fixed display time of the final game round, is the period TA6 (12.5 sec) obtained by adding the fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the regular game round to the execution period (12 sec) of the accessory opening and closing game. 5 sec), the remaining opening of the accessory opening/closing game does not occur after the start of the game cycle. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the reserved memory of the second special figure due to the start of the first game round, the game ball does not enter the second operating hole 34, and the second special figure game round is added. can't

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 85 is similar to the example in FIG. is the slowest to start. For this reason, in the actual game, when the phase of the second special game cycle and the general pattern game cycle (the character object opening and closing game of the general electric character object 34a) is out of phase, the end timing of the character object opening and closing game is the timing shown in the figure. It may be sooner than later, but never later. Therefore, no matter how the phases of both game rounds are shifted, if the fixed display time of 15 seconds is selected in the final game round, after the mode ends, after the game round of the second special figure starts, the second It is not possible to add special game times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the case where the fixed display time of 9 seconds is selected in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode will be described.

When the variation display of the 9th second special figure game round ends at timing t1, the high frequency support mode ends, and then the special figure stop result is stopped and displayed until timing t3 when the fixed display time (9 sec) elapses. continue.

In addition, when the variable display of the normal game round ends at the timing t1, the normal pattern stop result is stopped and displayed over the fixed display time (0.5 sec) for the normal pattern, and then it is the end timing of the stop display. At the timing t2, the third high winning accessory opening/closing game of the general electric accessory 34a is started. This third high winning accessory opening/closing game is continued until 12 sec, which is its execution period, elapses (timing t4).

On the other hand, the first game round of the second special figure after the end of the high-frequency support mode is started at the timing t3 when the confirmation display of the final game round ends, and this timing is the third high winning accessory. It comes earlier than the end timing t4 of the open/close game. In other words, the accessory opening/closing game continues over the start timing of the first game cycle. That is, the period TA5 (9 sec), which is the fixed display time of the final game, is the period TA6 (12. 5 sec), the remaining opening of the accessory opening/closing game occurs during execution of the first game cycle.

In addition, since a period TA7 (14.5 sec) obtained by adding the execution period (5.5 sec) of the first game round to the period TA5 (9 sec) is longer than the period TA6 (12.5 sec), The accessory opening/closing game does not continue until after the start of the game cycle. Therefore, when the fixed display time of 9 sec is selected in the final game round, after the mode ends, after the game round of the second special figure is started, the game round of the second special figure can be added once at maximum. be possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the case where the fixed display time of 4.5 sec is selected in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode will be described. In addition, the specific operation timings of the second special game round, the general game round, and the general electric accessory 34a are the same as in the case of FIG. 83 according to the fourth embodiment, so the explanation omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the fixed display time of 4.5 sec is selected, the period TA5 (4.5 sec), which is the fixed display time of the final game round, becomes the execution period (12 sec) of the accessory opening/closing game. Since it is shorter than the period TA6 (12.5 sec) obtained by adding the fixed display time (0.5 sec) of the normal game round, the remaining opening of the accessory opening and closing game occurs during the execution of the first game round. . Furthermore, the period TA7 (10 sec) obtained by adding the execution period (5.5 sec) of the first game round to the period TA5 (4.5 sec) is also shorter than the period TA6 (12.5 sec). The remaining opening of the accessory opening/closing game also occurs during execution of the second game cycle.

In addition, since a period TA8 (15.5 sec) obtained by adding the execution period (5.5 sec) of the second game round to the period TA7 (10 sec) is longer than the period TA6, after the start of the third game round The accessory opening/closing game does not continue until . Therefore, when the fixed display time of 4.5 sec is selected in the final game round, after the mode ends, after the game round of the second special scheme starts, the game round of the second special scheme is added a maximum of two times. becomes possible.

Thus, in the present embodiment, depending on which length of fixed display time is selected in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode, whether or not the game round of the second special figure is added and the number of game rounds that can be added The number changes, and the degree of advantage of the player in the game after the mode ends is different.

In the above embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, only one kind of accessory opening and closing game is used in the high-frequency support mode, but this embodiment is combined with the fourth embodiment, It may be configured to include a plurality of types of accessory opening and closing games with different execution periods. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display time of the final game round is the same length, but it may be configured to be different.

In addition, by applying any of the second to fourth embodiments to the present embodiment, after the mode ends, the game round of the second special figure that can be added after the game round of the second special figure is started , or may be configured to perform notification corresponding to the continuation period of the accessory opening/closing game after the end of the mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The high-frequency support mode is terminated at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round, and the first game round of the mode is started after the confirmation display time elapses from the end of the mode. In addition, the accessory opening/closing game can be executed across the end of the mode, and furthermore, the configuration is such that the fixed display time of the final game cycle is diversified.

In this case, depending on the length of the fixed display time (grace period), whether or not the accessory opening and closing game continues until after the start of the first game round, and if it continues, the length of the duration may change. do. For example, if the accessory opening/closing game continues even after the start of the first game cycle, the winning to the second operation port 34 can be generated in a state where the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is reduced, It becomes possible to add pending information (and game times). As a result, even though the high-frequency support mode has ended internally, it is equivalent to extending the mode until after the start of the first game round, and the player's expectation even after the mode ends. It is possible to continue playing the game.

As the selectable final game round fixed display time, a first period (4.5 sec, 9 sec fixed display time) shorter than the executable time (12 sec) of the accessory opening and closing game, and a second period longer than the executable time. Two periods (fixed display time of 15 sec) are provided, and the period selected by lottery is set as the fixed display time.

In the above configuration, except for the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game, it is possible to intentionally generate a state in which the reservation information can be added after the mode ends by the control of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加By adjusting the selection ratio of each period in the development or design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to install a function that enables the addition of hold information after the mode ends while maintaining the profit balance with the game hall, and the actual operation. A more preferable configuration can be obtained.

The configuration is such that the second period is more likely to be selected than the first period. In this case, the percentage of cases in which pending information cannot be added increases, so the value of an event that allows pending information to be added can be increased. This enhances the player's sense of superiority and accomplishment when the addition is achieved, and makes it possible to favorably increase the player's desire to play.

Regardless of the pending number RbN of the second special figure, it was configured to select the above-mentioned fixed display time. For example, the first period is selected as the fixed display time or the first period is the first If it is configured to be more likely to be selected than two periods, if a fraudulent act to increase the number of reservations RbN is performed, it will not only be an illegal acquisition of the reservation information (game times), but also an illegal game due to the selection of the first period. There is a concern that it will be realized in conjunction with making it more advantageous, and that it will encourage fraudulent behavior. In this regard, in this configuration, since the fixed display time is selected regardless of the number of holds RbN, even if a fraudulent act that increases the number of holds RbN is performed, the effect will be the length of the fixed display time (and even the end of the mode). (whether or not the pending information can be added later), and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, depending on the jackpot type (type of jackpot pattern) when the special jackpot that triggered the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, the game of the second special drawing that can be added after the high-frequency support mode ends It differs from each of the above embodiments in that the number of times is changed. This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96. FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the accessory opening and closing game during the high-frequency support mode is provided only with the third high winning accessory opening and closing game as in the sixth embodiment.

First, the structure of the 1st special figure display part AS is demonstrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 88(a) is a front view of the first special figure display portion AS, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the area including the first special figure display portion AS and its front side.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), a segment display 601 is provided in the first special figure display portion AS. A display area 605 is formed on the display surface of the segment display 601, and the display area 605 is provided with seven display segments SG1 to SG7. Each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 has an individual light source made up of an LED, and these individual light sources are controlled to turn on or off, so that only one display segment is lit, or any combination of light sources is turned on. It is possible to light up a plurality of display segments with . Since all the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, display by the display segments SG1 to SG7 is performed in a single color.

The display segments SG1 to SG7 are linear when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and in the display area 605, the display segments SG1 to SG7 are arranged in a figure "8". are placed in the By controlling which one of the display segments SG1 to SG7 is lit, it is possible to display a plurality of different patterns in appearance.

In the display area 605, each display segment SG1 to SG7 is repeatedly lit and extinguished with the winning of the first operation opening 33 as a trigger, and variable display (variable display or switching display) of the pattern is performed. After the variable display is performed, the display segments SG1 to SG7 set to be lit are continuously lit over the stop display period, and the pattern as the stop result is displayed. Thereby, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the first operation opening 33 is clearly indicated.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), the segment display 601 is mounted on the display board 602. As shown in FIG. The display board 602 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 through electrical wiring, and when a drive signal is output from the main control device 81 to the display board 602, the display segments SG1 to SG7 are lit. be. The display substrate 602 is positioned with respect to the decorative member 39 so that the entire display area 605 of the segment display 601 is exposed from the opening 39a provided in the decorative member 39, and fixed from the back side of the decorative member 39. ing.

A cover panel 603 is provided in front of the segment display 601 so as to face the display area 605 . The cover panel 603 is arranged so as to cover the opening 30 of the decorative member 39 from behind, and is translucent so that the display in the display area 605 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 and the cover panel 603. formed. Specifically, the cover panel 603 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin.

By making the cover panel 603 translucent in this way, while making the display in the first special figure display unit AS visible, the display in the first special figure display unit AS is compared to the case where the cover panel 603 is colorless and transparent. can be made inconspicuous. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the symbol display device 41 rather than the display in the first special figure display portion AS. However, it is not limited to this, and the cover panel 603 may be formed colorless and transparent, or the cover panel 603 may be defective.

Although illustration is omitted, the second special figure display portion BS also has the same configuration as the above.

Next, the stop result table for selecting the stop result (jackpot design) for the first special figure for the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 89 . The first special figure stop result table for the jackpot result is stored in the stop result table storage area provided in the ROM 113 of the main controller 81 . In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 loops in the range of "0" to "21".

As shown in FIG. 89, in the first special stop result table for the jackpot result, stop result data corresponding to each stop result is stored in association with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In the present embodiment, 22 types of stop results SD0 to SD21 are provided as the stop result of the first special figure for the jackpot result, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is assigned one by one to each stop result. ing.

As already mentioned, the first special figure display unit AS is provided with a plurality of display segments SG1 to SG7 as means for displaying the stop result, and the stop result data is displayed in these display segments SG1 to SG7. Among them, the information indicates which display segment is to be lit and which display segment is to be extinguished. For example, the stop result data corresponding to the stop result SD0 when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "0" turns on the display segments SG1, SG6, and SG7, while turning off the display segments SG2 to SG5. It has become. Therefore, when the stop result SD0 is set as the stop result, a pattern similar to the number "7" is displayed in the first special figure display portion AS.

Each picture shown in the "result display" column of FIG. 89 indicates a picture displayed by each stop result data. It should be noted that the "result display" item is added for the sake of convenience in order to make it easier to understand what pattern each stop result data corresponds to, and is stored in the stop result table as stop result information. not to be

The stop result setting process when a big hit occurs by the winning lottery of the first special figure is executed in the big hit result stop result setting process in step S608 of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 24). In step S608, the stop result table shown in FIG. 89 is referred to, and the stop result corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is selected. Here, as shown in FIG. 90(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special figure (a table for selecting the jackpot type when the first special jackpot occurs), the jackpot type counter C2 "0" to "11" correspond to the 5R jackpot result A, and "12" to "21" of the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to the 5R jackpot result B.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89, the stop results SD0 to SD11 associated with "0" to "11" of the jackpot type counter C2 become a pattern (jackpot pattern) indicating that it is the 5R jackpot result A, The stop result associated with "11" to "21" of the jackpot type counter C2 becomes a pattern indicating that SD12 to SD21 are the 5R jackpot result B.

In this embodiment, the stop result and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated one-to-one, but if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 does not overlap between the stop results, one stop result On the other hand, it may be configured to correspond to the values of a plurality of jackpot type counters C2.

After executing the stop result setting process for the jackpot result as described above, the stop result command including the information of the stop result is set as a transmission target to the effect control device 82 . This process is performed in step S620 of FIG. The set stop result command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The effect control device 82 can specify the selected stop result (jackpot symbol) by receiving and analyzing the stop result command.

<Setting process of special figure fluctuation display time>
Next, the setting processing of the special figure fluctuation display time executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG. In this figure, the same step numbers are attached to the processing similar to the special figure fluctuation display time setting processing of FIG. 25, and the description thereof is omitted or simplified.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second special figure flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. When it determines with the 2nd special figure flag being stored, it progresses to step S702 and determines whether the specific state flag is stored in the said various flag storage area 114e. That is, by executing the processes of steps S701 and S702, it is determined whether or not the current game round is the second special figure game round in the specific state. Here, the specific state is a game state in which the game can be played by receiving the winning lottery of the second special symbol. This is the game state until the number RbN becomes zero.

If it is determined that the specific state flag is stored in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703, and the result of this lottery (this time's second special drawing lottery in the specific state) is a big hit or a small hit. Determine whether or not there is When it is determined that it is not a big hit or a small hit, the process proceeds to step S4701, and it is determined whether or not the first hit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. The first hit flag is stored when a big hit that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs. It is stored when the type of jackpot is 5R jackpot result A. Since it is sufficient to store the first hit flag before the start of the specific state, it does not necessarily have to be stored when the big win occurs. (the start of the specific state). Also, the first hit flag is erased when the specific state ends.

If it is determined that the first hit flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4702, and the variation display time and the fixed display time are distributed (selected) with reference to the variation display time table B1 of the second special figure for out. conduct.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the present embodiment, two types of tables are provided as the variation display table of the second special figure for the deviation in the specific state, and the variation display time table B1 is one of them. . The variable display time table B1 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(a).

The variable display time table B1 is similar to the variable display table B (FIG. 84(a)) according to the sixth embodiment, and is the second display table in which the value of the specific number-of-games counter area OC is "9". A plurality of fixed display times are set (stored) for the game round of the special figure, that is, the final game round of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, three types of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec are set as the fixed display time. Then, as described in the sixth embodiment, when the fixed display time of 15 seconds is selected in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode, after the mode ends, after the first game round starts, the second If it is not possible to add the second special symbol game round and the fixed display time of 9 seconds or 4 seconds is selected, the second special symbol game round is added after the first game round is started after the mode ends. It becomes possible. That is, by selecting the latter fixed display time, the player can proceed with the game more advantageously after the mode ends than when the former fixed display time is selected. Note that the specific correspondence relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS and each fixed display time is the same as the variation display time table B1 of FIG. 84(a) according to the sixth embodiment. omitted.

Returning to the description of the setting process of the special figure fluctuation display time in FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot pattern (stop result) of the jackpot (jackpot of the first special figure) is any one of the stop results SD0 to SD5. Here, as shown in FIG. 89, the stop results corresponding to the 5R jackpot result A in which the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the jackpot game ends are 12 kinds of stop results SD1 to SD11. Results SD0 to SD5 are partial stop results.

In this step, the determination is made by determining whether or not the specific symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM114. The specific symbol flag indicates that the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is one of the stop results SD0 to SD5. This flag is stored at any timing between the start of the game round in which the jackpot was won and the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot win (at the start of the specific state), and is stored at the end of the specific state. erased.

When it is determined that the jackpot pattern that triggered the transition to the high-frequency support mode is one of the stop results SD0 to SD5, the process proceeds to step S4702, and the variable display time table B1 is referred to for variable display. Distributes (selects) time and fixed display time. That is, at the time of occurrence of the jackpot that triggered the transition to the high-frequency support mode, if any of the stop results SD0 to SD5 is selected as the stop result, the confirmation display in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode The time is selected from three types of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec. In this case, by selecting the fixed display time of 9 sec or 4.5 sec, it becomes possible to add the game round of the second special figure after the first game round is started after the mode ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot design is not one of the stop results SD0 to SD5, that is, if it is one of the stop results SD7 to SD11, the process proceeds to step S4704, and the variation of the second special figure for the deviation The variable display time and fixed display time are sorted (selected) with reference to the display time table B2. The variation display time table B2 is one of a plurality of types of tables provided as a variation display table for the second special figure for the deviation in the specific state. The variable display time table B2 will be described with reference to FIG. 92(b).

The variable display time table B2 has only one type of fixed display time of 15 sec for the second special game round with the value of the specific game number counter area OC being "9", that is, the final game round in the high-frequency support mode. is set. Then, as described in the sixth embodiment, when the length of the fixed display time in the final game round of the high-frequency support mode is 15 seconds, after the mode ends and after the first game round starts, It is not possible to add the game round of the second special figure. That is, when the jackpot symbol is one of the stop results SD7 to SD11, the second special symbol game round cannot be added.

The variable display time and fixed display time when the value of the specific game number counter area OC is "1" to "8" and "10" to "15" are the variable display time table shown in FIG. 92(a). It is the same as the case of B1.

After executing step S4702 or step S4704, in step S707, the variable display time selected in each step is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. FIG.

<Special Figure Variation Display Control Processing>
Next, the special figure fluctuation display control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is executed as part of regular processing started by the MPU 242 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 msec).

First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the special figure game round is being executed. If it is determined that the special figure game round is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S4802, and it is determined whether or not the special figure variation command (step S620 in FIG. 24) is received from the main controller 81.

If it is determined that the special figure variation command is not received, the special figure variation display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has received a special figure variation command, to start the special figure game round production (variation display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, etc.) in the symbol display device 41, step S4803 A special figure fluctuation start process is executed, and then the special figure fluctuation display control process is terminated. Here, the special figure fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S4901, the command for special figure fluctuation received this time is read, and the information of the fluctuation display time is specified from the command. Further, in step S4901, based on the stop result command transmitted from the main controller 81, the information of the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the special figure display section 43 is specified. Furthermore, in step S4901, from the specified information, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, information on the presence or absence of jackpot winning, information on jackpot type in the case of jackpot winning, information on the presence or absence of small win winning, small winning In some cases, the information on the small hit type is grasped and stored in a holding storage area provided in the RAM 244.例文帳に追加

In the following step S4902, based on the information grasped in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the current special figure game round is a winning result (a big winning result or a small winning result). If it is determined to be a hit result, the process advances to step S4903 to execute stop result setting processing for a big hit. In this step, based on the winning symbol information obtained in step S4901, the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be variably displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is set. In this step, when it is determined that a big hit has occurred in the winning lottery of the first special figure, between the big winning pattern (stop result) stopped and displayed in the first special figure display unit AS, shown in FIG. The stop results of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set so as to have a corresponding relationship. For example, when the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol are the stop results SD0 and SD1, the stop result in which the main symbols of "7" are arranged on one effective line L1 to L5 is established as the current stop result. decide.

In the following step S4904, a winning effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process for winning, the variable display time of the game cycle to be executed this time is referred to, and the process of setting the effect pattern for winning such as normal reach or super reach is executed.

If the determination in step S4902 is negative, the process advances to step S4905 to determine whether reach will occur in the current game cycle. If reach occurs, the process advances to step S4906 to execute stop result setting processing for reach. In the ready-to-win stop result setting process, a stop result in which a combination of off-ready-to-win symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is set as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combination of winning reach symbols and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In the following step S4907, effect setting processing for reach generation is executed. In this process, the variable display time of the game round to be executed this time is referred to, and the process of setting an effect pattern for outlier reach such as normal reach or super reach is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4905, the process advances to step S4908 to execute stop result setting processing for normal deviation. In the stop result setting processing for normal failure, the current stop result is set so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 and not to stop the combination of winning reach symbols. do. In the following step S4909, an effect setting process for normal deviation for setting an effect pattern for normal deviation with no reach occurring is executed.

After executing the processing of step S4904, step S4907 or step S4909, the process proceeds to step S4910, and the command including the determined stop result and effect pattern information is output to the display control device 212 as a stop pattern command and a pattern command, respectively. Execute the processing to be performed. The MPU 272 of the display control device 212 controls the pattern display device 41 to perform the effect in the current special figure game round based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

In the following step S4911, after executing the process of starting the special figure game round effect, this special figure fluctuation start process is terminated. Specifically, based on the determined production pattern, the speaker unit 64 and the display light emitting unit 63 are driven and controlled to start the production for the special figure game round.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation display control process in FIG. 93, if the affirmative determination is made in the above step S4801 (it is determined that the special figure game round is being executed), the process proceeds to step S4804, and the special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed determine whether or not This determination is to measure (grasp) the elapsed time from the start of the special figure game round production (or to receive the command for special figure fluctuation) by the MPU 242, and the elapsed time to the fluctuation display time specified in the above step S4901 This is done by judging whether or not it has reached. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation display time has not passed, the process proceeds to step S4805, the special figure fluctuation medium process is executed, and then the special figure fluctuation display control process is terminated. In the special figure fluctuation middle process, the display control device 212 is controlled so as to execute the special figure game round production with the production contents determined in the special figure fluctuation start process. At this time, before the predetermined time elapses special figure fluctuation display time, step S4903, step S4906, step S4908 in FIG. The variable display of Z1 to Z3 is terminated sequentially.

When the negative determination is made in step S4804, the process proceeds to step S4806 and executes processing for special figure confirmation display. In the processing for special figure confirmation display, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 temporarily stopped and displayed is confirmed and displayed, and this state is continued until the confirmation display time elapses. After execution of step S4806, this special figure fluctuation display control processing ends.

<About the game flow>
Next, the game flow will be described with reference to FIG. (a) of FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop result displayed in the first special figure display unit AS and the variable display time table of the second special figure selected in the specific state, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the variable display time table of the second special symbol selected in the specific state. be.

In the game of the first special figure before the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs, if the jackpot result is obtained and the stop result displayed at that time is the stop result SD0 or SD1, FIG. ), the variable display time table for the second special figure selected in the specific state is the variable display time table B1. This variable display time table B1, as shown in FIG. 92(a), has fixed display times of 15 sec, 9 sec, The length can be selected from three types of 4.5 sec. Of these, the fixed display time of 9 sec and 4.5 sec enables the addition of the second special figure pending information after the end of the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, in the variable display time table B2, as shown in FIG. 92(b), the fixed display time is only 15 sec. It is not possible to add the reservation information of the special figure.

Therefore, if the stop result of the first special figure is the stop result SD0 or SD1, and the fixed display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B1, the pending information can be added. It becomes a special state in which smoothness is preferentially treated, and it becomes easy to add hold information in the game after the mode ends. Then, when the stop result SD0 or SD1 is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display portion AS, the main symbol "7" is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 96(b). A stop result lined up on any of the valid lines L1 to L5 is displayed. In this case, the player, from the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G, after the end of the big win game state, to shift to the high-frequency support mode that becomes the special state, that is, after the end of the mode It can be recognized that there is a high degree of expectation that the pending information can be added in the game.

Even if the stop result SD2 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot of the first special figure before shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the fixed display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B1 in the same manner as above. The degree of expectation that the pending information can be added in the game after the mode ends is high. Further, when the stop result SD6 is stopped and displayed by the jackpot of the first special figure, the fixed display time of the second special figure is determined by referring to the variable display time table B2, and the hold information in the game after the end of the mode. cannot be added. In both cases where the stop results SD2 and SD6 are stopped and displayed, the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 displays a stop result in which the main symbols of "3" are lined up on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. be. In this case, the player cannot uniquely determine whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode, which is the special state, based on the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Therefore, it is possible to add the fun of playing a game by guessing whether to shift to such a high-frequency support mode.

In addition, when the stop results SD3 and SD7 are stopped and displayed in the first special figure display unit AS (the stop result in which the main symbols of "5" are lined up is displayed stopped on the display screen G), the stop results SD4, SD8 and SD9 are displayed. When stop display is performed (the stop result in which the main symbols of "1" are lined up is displayed on the display screen G), when the stop results SD5, SD10, and SD11 are displayed stop (on the display screen G, the main symbol of "9" is displayed). ) also cannot uniquely determine whether to shift to the high-frequency support mode, which is the special state, based on the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. A game can be played by estimating whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode.

However, when the stop results SD4, SD8, and SD9 are stopped and displayed, it is one of the stop results SD4 that determines the fixed display time of the second special figure with reference to the variable display time table B1. On the other hand, it is two stop results SD8 and SD9 that the fixed display time of the second special figure is determined with reference to the variable display time table B2. That is, compared to the case where the stop results SD3 and SD7 are stopped and displayed, the rate of the special state is low, and the expectation that the pending information can be added in the game after the mode ends is low. . This is also the case when the stop results SD5, SD10, and SD11 are stopped and displayed.

Therefore, from the player's point of view, when the stop result with the main symbols "7" lined up on the display screen G is stopped and displayed, the degree of expectation that the pending information can be added in the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode is the highest. , when the stop result with the main symbols of "3" or "5" is stop-displayed, and when the stop result with the main symbols of "1" or "9" is stop-displayed, the above expectations are lower. Become. Therefore, the player can expect to see a stop result advantageous to him/herself in the game of the first special figure before the shift to the high-frequency support mode occurs.

In the present embodiment, in order to clarify the difference between the variable display time table B1 and the variable display time table B2, the variable display time table B2 does not have a fixed display time that allows addition of pending information. However, it is not limited to this. For example, both variable display time tables B1 and B2 are provided with a fixed display time that allows addition of pending information, and the fixed display time is more likely to be selected in the variable display time table B1 than in the variable display time table B2. may be Further, the fixed display time of 4.5 sec, which increases the number of possible additions, is provided only in the variable display time table B1, or the fixed display time is provided in both the variable display time tables B1 and B2, and then the variable display time table B1 may be configured to be more likely to be selected.

Also, in this embodiment, any one of the second to fourth embodiments is applied, and after the mode ends, the game round of the second special figure that can be added after the game round of the second special figure is started , or may be configured to perform notification corresponding to the continuation period of the accessory opening/closing game after the end of the mode.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

As the variable display time table of the second special figure, a variable display time table B1 and a variable display time table B2 with different expectations for adding hold information after the end of the high frequency support mode are provided, and the final game of the above mode is provided. When selecting the fixed display time of the time, it is configured to switch which of the variable display time tables B1 and B2 to refer to depending on the type of stop result at the time of the first special figure jackpot that triggered the shift to the above mode. and

According to this configuration, it is possible to create a special state in which the degree of expectation is preferentially treated, so that the player shifts to the high-frequency support mode with a strong sense of expectation for such a special state. You can play the previous game round. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase interest not only in the game at the end of the high-frequency support mode or after the end, but also in the game before shifting to the mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, depending on the type of stop result (jackpot pattern) that is stopped and displayed in the special figure display unit 43 at the time of the jackpot that is the trigger for transition to the high-frequency support mode It can also be said that there is a configuration in which the degree of advantage of the game changes. In conventional pachinko machines, the types of jackpot symbols are related only to the degree of advantage in the jackpot game state and the degree of advantage in the high-frequency support mode, but in this configuration, the degree of advantage in the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode is affected. and can provide unprecedented new game characteristics. As a result, a fresh impression can be given to the player, and it is possible to favorably increase the desire to play and the degree of attention to the game.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, a so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine was exemplified as a pachinko machine. In this case, in addition to the high-frequency support mode, even if the configuration of each of the above embodiments is applied to a high-probability mode (so-called variable probability state or high-probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than the normal game state good. It should be noted that the high probability mode can be applied to a so-called ST in which the mode ends when the number of game rounds executed after shifting to the mode reaches a predetermined number.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the general electrical accessory 34a, a general electrical accessory 700 having the following configuration may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 97, the general electric accessory 700 has a bulging portion 701 that bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 24 . A front surface portion 701a of the bulging portion 701 faces the window panel 62 in the longitudinal direction of the game machine, and the distance between the front surface portion 701a and the window panel 62 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game ball from passing in front of the bulging portion 701 .

The bulging portion 701 is formed with a second operating port 34 that opens upward and into which a game ball can enter. A shutter as a movable body covers the second operating port 34 from above. 702 are arranged. The shutter 702 has a flat plate shape and is held so as to be slidable in the thickness direction (back and forth direction) of the game board 24 . That is, the shutter 702 has a protruding position (advance position) that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 24, and a retracted position (backward position) that retracts backward from the protruding position and suppresses the amount of protrusion to the front of the game machine. and can be displaced. The driving of the shutter 702 is performed by the aforementioned electric accessory driving section 34b.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), when the shutter 702 is positioned at the projecting position, the shutter 702 covers the second operating port 34 from above. As a result, the second operating port 34 (general electric accessory 700) is closed, and even if the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 reaches the upper region of the second operating port 34, the operating port 34 cannot win. becomes. The height position of the shutter 702 is set so that the upper surface portion 702a thereof is substantially flush with the upper surface portion 701b of the bulging portion 701 when the shutter 702 is positioned at the projecting position.

Although not shown, a guide portion such as a nail is provided on the right side of the bulging portion 701 to guide the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 onto the upper surface portion 701b of the bulging portion 701 . For this reason, the game ball that reaches the universal electrical accessory 700 in a state where the second operating port 34 is in the closed state is placed on the upper surface portion 701b of the bulging portion 701, and then the upper surface portion of the shutter 702 as the ball receiving means. 702a. There is also a game ball that flows down from above the upper surface portion 702 of the shutter 702 and is directly received by the upper surface portion 702 of the shutter 702 without passing through the upper surface portion 701b of the bulging portion 701 . Then, the game ball received by the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702 rolls on the upper surface portion 702a so as to move from the right side to the left side as shown in FIG. 97(b).

In addition, in the configuration shown in the figure, when the closed state, the winning of the game ball to the second operation port 34 is disabled, but compared with the open state described later, the configuration is such that the winning is possible within a range where it is difficult to win. may be

As shown in FIG. 97(c), when the shutter 702 is at the retracted position, the shutter 702 is retracted from above the second operating port 34 and the second operating port 34 is opened upward. As a result, the second operating port 34 is opened, and the game ball in the upper region of the second operating port 34 can enter the operating port 34 . When the position of the shutter 702 is switched from the protruded position to the retracted position, if game balls are placed on the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702, those game balls fall downward as the shutter 702 retreats. , enters the second operating port 34 .

As shown in FIG. 97(a), a plurality of projecting portions 703 projecting upward are provided on an upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702. As shown in FIG. These protruding portions 703 are arranged at the front end portion of the upper surface portion 702a and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine. A plurality of projecting portions 704 projecting forward corresponding to the projecting portions 703 are provided on the front surface of the game board 24 . The projecting portion 704 is arranged alternately with the projecting portion 703 in the horizontal direction of the game machine. Therefore, the game ball received by the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702 moves in a meandering manner while its moving speed is decelerated due to the collision with the projecting portions 703 and 704, so that the staying period on the upper surface portion 702a is extended. be prolonged. That is, the protruding portions 703 and 704 constitute retention means capable of retaining the game ball on the upper surface portion 702a or deceleration means for reducing the moving speed of the game ball. The retention means or deceleration means is not limited to meandering the game ball as described above. Other configurations are possible.

Due to the above configuration, the game ball fired in a state where the second operation port 34 (universal electrical accessory 700) is in the closed state (more specifically, the game ball that has reached the upper region of the second operation port 34 ) can be made to enter the second operating port 34 . Therefore, especially in the second opening/closing pattern according to the first embodiment, even if the player continuously shoots the game ball, the game ball is useless (the game ball is out without entering the second operation opening 34). events leading to the mouth 37) can be suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the player adjusting the shooting timing of the game ball by looking at the timing of the open state and the period of the open state, thereby making it easier to play the game.

In addition, in the above configuration, the disadvantage of the second opening/closing pattern (retention number RbN and the number of balls held are likely to be reduced) is alleviated. good too. Also, the first opening/closing pattern does not guarantee winning up to the upper limit number, but it may be changed to a mode in which winning to the second actuation opening 34 is more likely to occur than in the second opening/closing pattern.

In addition, the residence time on the upper surface portion 702a in the above configuration is not particularly limited, but the waiting time in the second opening/closing pattern (if there are a plurality of waiting periods in the second opening/closing pattern, at least one of them In other words, during the period from the end of one opening in the second opening/closing pattern to the start of the next opening, the upper surface of the shutter 702 It is preferable to set the length of time in which all the game balls that have reached 702a can enter the second operation opening 34 by the next opening. Also, when the above configuration is applied to the fifth to seventh embodiments, the waiting time in the high-frequency support mode accessory opening and closing game (if there are multiple waiting periods, at least one of them one waiting time or each waiting time). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of wasted balls.

Alternatively, the plurality of protruding portions 703 may be formed on the front cover portion (or front decoration) provided on the front surface portion 701a of the bulging portion 701 instead of the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702 . Specifically, a plate-like front cover portion whose lateral dimension is at least longer than the lateral dimension of the shutter 702 is provided integrally or separately with the front face portion 701a of the bulging portion 701, and the upper end portion of the front cover portion is located above the upper surface portion 702 a of the shutter 702 . At this time, the front cover part is arranged so that at least a part of the shutter 702 can be seen from the front of the gaming machine, more specifically, the shutter 702 can be seen to the extent that the player can recognize the opening and closing of the shutter 702. At least part of the part is a colored or colorless transparent translucent part. Above the upper surface portion 702a of the shutter 702, the protrusion portion 703 is formed on the inner surface of the front cover portion (the surface facing the protrusion portion 704) so as to protrude toward the game board 24 side. In this case, each projecting portion 703 may extend vertically in the same manner as the projecting portion 704 on the game board 24 side. With such a configuration as well, the game ball rolling on the shutter 702 can be meandered (decelerated), and the same effects as those of the general electric accessory 700 shown in FIG. 97 can be achieved. Note that the projecting portion 703 may be provided on both the inner surface of the front cover portion and the upper surface portion 702 a of the shutter 702 .

(3) In each of the above embodiments, only the high winning role opening and closing game is performed in the high frequency support mode, but in addition to the high winning role opening and closing game, the low winning role opening and closing game , Accessory opening/closing game shown in FIG. 18(a) may be performed. However, in order to ensure the superiority of the high-frequency support mode, the configuration is such that the high winning accessory opening/closing game is more likely to be executed. Further, in the case of the low-frequency support mode, in addition to the low winning accessory opening and closing game, the high winning accessory opening and closing game may be performed. Also in this case, in order to ensure the superiority of the high-frequency support mode, the configuration is such that the low winning accessory opening/closing game is more likely to be executed.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, there are cases where the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs after the jackpot game ends, and there are cases where the transition does not occur, but after the jackpot game ends, the transition to the high-frequency support mode is guaranteed. may be configured. In other words, it may be possible to shift to the high-frequency support mode regardless of the jackpot type at the time of winning the jackpot.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the high-frequency support mode is entered, and the high-frequency support flag is deleted from the various flag storage area 114e. However, when information corresponding to the first value is stored in a specific storage area provided in the various flag storage area 114e, the high-frequency support mode is entered, The high-frequency support mode may end when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value is stored in the specific storage area. Further, the high-frequency support mode may end when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when a V jackpot occurs, it is configured to always shift to the high-frequency support mode after the V jackpot game ends, but when the V jackpot game ends and does not shift to the high-frequency support mode It is good also as a certain structure. At that time, the probability of shifting to the high frequency support mode should be higher than the probability of shifting to the mode at the time of the first win.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the V jackpot will almost certainly occur in the small win game corresponding to the second special figure, but it may be configured to occur with a predetermined probability if it does not occur. good. In this case, the probability of occurrence may be higher than the probability of non-occurrence, or vice versa.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the number of executions of the game rounds during the high-frequency support mode is counted only for the second special round, but both the first special scheme and the second special scheme are counted. You may count times as a target. In other words, the high-frequency support mode may end when the total number of games played reaches nine. By the way, 9 times is only an example, and the standard number of times to end the game rounds in the high-frequency support mode (so-called time-saving number of times) is not particularly limited.

(9) Apply the configuration (accessory opening and closing game) of each of the above embodiments to the opening and closing game of the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B (jackpot game, small win game, round game during the jackpot game) You may

(10) In each of the above embodiments, when the high-frequency support mode ends during the execution of the variable display of the normal game round, the winning result of the game round is forcibly changed to the losing result. A configuration that does not change is also possible.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, only game balls that flow down the right route are configured to pass through the through gate 35, the second operating port 34, and the general electric accessory 34a or win prizes, but flow down the left route. A configuration may be adopted in which only game balls that are to be played can pass or win a prize, or a configuration may be adopted in which either the right route or the left route can pass or win a prize. However, in terms of sharpening the game, only game balls that flow down either the right route or the left route can enter the first operation opening 33, and only game balls that flow down either the right route or the left route can enter the through gate. 35, the second operation port 34, and the general electrical accessory 34a may be configured to be able to pass through or win a prize.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, when the winning to the second operation opening 34 occurs in a state where the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is the upper limit number, the reservation information is not acquired. Information may be acquired and may not be stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b. This is the same for the first special figure.

(13) In each of the embodiments described above, the upper limit of the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure is four, but it may be three or less, or may be five or more. This is the same for the number of reservations RaN of the first special figure and the number of reservations of the general figure.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the second operating port 34 is more advantageous to the player than the first operating port 33 in the win/fail lottery, the sorting of big win types, the sorting of small win types, and the like. The first working opening 33 may be more advantageous than the second working opening 34, or the working openings 33 and 34 may be configured so as not to differ in the degree of advantage.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the second special symbol game round based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is given priority over the first special symbol game round based on the winning of the first operating port 33. Although it is configured to be executed, the game round of the first special figure may be configured to be executed with priority over the game round of the second special figure. Alternatively, the game rounds may be executed in the order in which the first operation opening 33 and the second operation opening 34 are won, without preferentially executing one of the game rounds over the other.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, after entering the specific state, the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure becomes 0 and the game round of the second special figure is completed, thereby determining that the specific state has ended. However, it may be configured to determine that the specific state has ended when the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure becomes 0 and the accessory opening and closing game ends. In addition, it may be configured to determine that the specific state has ended by the second special figure holding number RbN becoming 0, the accessory opening and closing game being completed, and the second special figure game cycle being completed.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, it is determined whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode crosses the end timing of the high-frequency support mode before the end timing, and based on the result A configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined notification is performed before the end timing. For example, when it is grasped that the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode crosses the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, a predetermined notification is always performed, or when it is grasped that the end timing is crossed. A performance lottery is performed at the time of the drawing, and a predetermined notification is performed when the lottery is won, or a predetermined notification can be performed both when it is grasped that the end timing is crossed and when it is grasped that it is not crossed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined notification is more likely to be given when it is determined that the vehicle will be straddled than when it is determined that the vehicle is not straddled.

In the above configuration, the predetermined notification may be, for example, a notification such as "Chance!". It should be noted that the predetermined notification does not necessarily have to be performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41, and may be configured to be performed on the general electrical accessory 34a or a display section provided in its peripheral portion. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the general electric accessory 34a and the predetermined notification at the same time. In addition, the notification in this case does not necessarily have to be an image display. For example, a light emitting unit as the display unit may be provided, and the notification may be performed based on the emitted light color, the emitted light intensity, the number of light emitting elements, etc. . Further, the display portion may be provided in the second operating port 34 or its peripheral portion.

In addition, when it is grasped that the accessory opening and closing game started during the high-frequency support mode does not straddle the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, when it is grasped that it straddles, a predetermined notification that is not executed is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the predetermined notification is more likely to be performed than when it is grasped that the vehicle is broken or straddled.

In the above configuration, as in the fifth to seventh embodiments, there is a time difference between the end timing of the high-frequency support mode and the start timing of the first special figure game round after the end of the high-frequency support mode. In the configuration, whether or not the accessory opening and closing game started during the high-frequency support mode straddles the start timing of the first special figure game round is grasped before the start timing or the end timing, A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined notification is given based on the result. The predetermined notification in this case may be performed before the start timing or before the end timing. In addition, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments, the high-frequency support mode ends at the start timing of the confirmation display of the final game round in the high-frequency support mode as in the above-described fifth to seventh embodiments. Also in this case, whether or not the accessory opening and closing game started during the high frequency support mode crosses the start timing of the first special figure game round is grasped before the start timing or the end timing. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the second high winning accessory opening/closing game and the third high winning accessory opening/closing game whose executable period is longer than the fixed display time are executed, the accessory Grasping whether or not the opening/closing game straddles the end timing or the start timing (when the first high winning accessory opening/closing game whose executable period is shorter than the fixed display time is executed, the above grasping process is executed. not). In this case, not only the grasping process is executed in both the second high prize opening/closing game and the third high prize opening/closing game, but the third high prize opening/closing game on the longer side is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the grasping process is executed in the case.

Also, when applied to the first to fourth embodiments, it is better not to shoot the game ball as the predetermined notification, the shooting operation aiming at the general electrical role 34a (second operation port 34) It is better not to do it, prompting a shooting operation aimed at another area where the game ball does not reach the general electric role 34a (area different from the arrangement area of the general electric role 34a), or those are more advantageous A configuration may be adopted in which notification is made so that the player can recognize that there is something. In this case, the notification is the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern of the accessory opening/closing game that straddles the end timing (if the end timing arrives in the middle of the first opening/closing pattern, the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern before the end timing). should be done in accordance with As a specific aspect of the predetermined notification, for example, a display or voice notification such as "It is better not to hit it now" is performed during the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern, or it is provided in the general electrical accessory 34a or its peripheral part. A configuration is conceivable in which the light-emitting portion is switched from the lit state to the off state, maintained in the off state during the execution period of the first opening/closing pattern, and switched back to the lit state upon completion of the pattern.

In place of or in addition to the above configuration, the execution period of the second opening/closing pattern of the accessory opening/closing game straddling the end timing (if the end timing arrives in the middle of the second opening/closing pattern, the second opening/closing pattern after the end timing Pattern execution period), it is better to shoot a game ball as the predetermined notification, it is better to perform a shooting operation aiming at the general electrical role 34a (second operation port 34), the general electrical role 34a Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a shooting operation aimed at an area where the game ball can be reached is urged, or a notification is made so that the player can recognize that it is more advantageous. As such a notification, for example, a notification such as "Aim for an electric chew" can be considered. In this case as well, the form of the predetermined notification is not limited to display or voice notification. A configuration may be adopted in which light is emitted in a light emission mode different from that during execution of the pattern (light emission in a specific color, increased light emission intensity, different light emission pattern, etc.).

Further, the process of grasping whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode straddles the end timing of the high-frequency support mode is the same as in the second to fourth embodiments. It may be performed in the middle of or before the start of the accessory opening/closing game. In the latter configuration, after grasping the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game, the executable period of the accessory opening/closing game, and the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, the end timing of the accessory opening/closing game is determined. It is good to grasp whether or not to cross over. In this case, the look-ahead result of the normal figure reservation may be used to grasp the start timing of the accessory opening and closing game and the executable period of the accessory opening and closing game. Specifically, the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery, and the execution period of the normal drawing game round (variable display time and fixed display time (if the fixed display time is fixed, only the variable display time may be used)) and When there are a plurality of types of accessory opening/closing games, the types thereof are specified by pre-reading processing, and based on the result, the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game and the executable period of the accessory opening/closing game are grasped. The look-ahead of the general pattern reservation can be performed by executing the same processing as the reservation confirmation processing (the look-ahead processing of the special pattern reservation) in FIG. 57 for the general pattern reservation.

In addition, if the above grasping process is performed before the start of the final special figure game round in the high-frequency support mode, the execution period of the special figure game round (fluctuation display time and fixed display time (fixed display If the time is fixed, only the variable display time is acceptable)), and based on the result, it is good to grasp the end timing of the high-frequency support mode (remaining period until the end timing).

(18) In the first embodiment, the opening/closing control is performed once in the first opening/closing pattern. It is good also as several times in the aspect that an interval becomes short). In this case, by setting the total opening time of each opening in the first opening/closing pattern to be equal to or greater than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit winning number, the winning of the upper limit winning number is generated from the start to the end of the opening/closing pattern. It becomes possible to let

Further, when the number of opening/closing controls in the first opening/closing pattern is set to a plurality of times, the opening time of each opening/closing control may be the same length, or may be different lengths. When the length of the opening time is varied, if the first opening/closing pattern has three or more opening/closing controls, the length of the opening time may be made different for all the opening/closing controls, or one opening/closing control may be used. may be configured such that the length of the opening time in the is different from that of the other one opening/closing control.

Furthermore, with respect to the second opening/closing pattern, the length of the opening time of each opening/closing control may be the same, or the length of the opening time in one opening/closing control may be different from that of another opening/closing control or another opening/closing control. may be

(19) In the above-described first embodiment, the first opening/closing pattern is not provided, or the first opening/closing pattern does not guarantee winning up to the upper limit, but the second operating opening 34 is more likely than the second opening/closing pattern. It may be changed to one that is likely to win a prize.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment, the opening time of the general electric accessory 34a for all openings in the second opening and closing pattern is set to be equal to or more than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to twice the firing cycle. However, the second opening/closing pattern may include an open time that is equal to or more than the firing cycle of the game ball and is less than or equal to twice the firing cycle.

(21) The configuration of the first embodiment may be applied to the accessory opening/closing game during the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, as aspects of the opening and closing game of the accessory in the low frequency support mode, a low winning accessory opening and closing game in which winning to the second operation port 34 is unlikely to occur, and a high winning accessory opening and closing game in which the winning is likely to occur A configuration is conceivable in which the configuration of each of the above embodiments is applied to a pachinko machine having a game (a high winning accessory opening and closing game for a low-frequency support mode).

In such a pachinko machine, high winning accessory opening/closing games do not occur frequently as in the high frequency support mode, but high winning accessory opening/closing games do not occur very often in the low frequency support mode, and even if they occur, There are many things that end in just one time. Therefore, it is effective to increase the upper limit number of prizes to be won more than the upper limit number of reserved storage numbers. For example, if the upper limit winning number is set to 10 and the upper limit number to the reserved storage number is set to 4, when the winning to the second operating port 34 is generated under the first opening/closing pattern, up to 5 times. Although the winning of 1 leads to the storage of the reserved information, the subsequent winnings become invalid winnings, and the accessory opening/closing game ends before the second opening/closing pattern is started. Therefore, in the end, only five pieces of pending information can be obtained. On the other hand, if a prize is generated under the second open/close pattern, ten pieces of pending information can be obtained. In this way, the number of pieces of pending information that can be acquired can be made different depending on the result of selection by the player as to which opening/closing pattern he or she intends to win. can be improved.

(22) In the above-described first embodiment, only one type of accessory opening/closing game is used in the high-frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure which has. In this case, as another aspect of the accessory opening/closing game in the high-frequency support mode, the first high winning accessory opening/closing game of the fifth embodiment may be used. In this case, in all types of accessory opening and closing games that can be performed in the high-frequency support mode, if the high-frequency support mode ends during execution, the rest of the mode may be continued after the end of the mode. As far as the high winning accessory opening/closing game according to the first embodiment, the rest of the high frequency support mode may be continuously executed after the end of the high frequency support mode.

(23) In the above second and third embodiments, grasping whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode straddles the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, and the number of holds that can be added Although the processing is configured to be performed in the middle of the accessory opening/closing game, it may be performed before the start of the accessory opening/closing game. In this case, it is preferable to perform each of the above grasping processes after grasping the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game, the executable period of the accessory opening/closing game, and the end timing of the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the look-ahead result of the normal figure reservation may be used to grasp the start timing of the accessory opening and closing game and the executable period of the accessory opening and closing game. Specifically, the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery, and the execution period of the normal drawing game round (variable display time and fixed display time (if the fixed display time is fixed, only the variable display time may be used)) and When there are a plurality of types of accessory opening/closing games, the types thereof are specified by pre-reading processing, and based on the result, the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game and the executable period of the accessory opening/closing game are grasped.

It should be noted that, if the process of grasping whether or not the end timing is crossed or the number of holds that can be added is performed before the start of the final special figure game round in the high frequency support mode, the special figure game round by the special figure reservation prefetch process Prefetch the execution period (variable display time and fixed display time (if the fixed display time is fixed, only the variable display time is acceptable)), and based on the result, the end timing of the high-frequency support mode (until the end timing period).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, whether or not the accessory opening/closing game started during the high-frequency support mode straddles the end timing of the high-frequency support mode, and the duration of the accessory opening/closing game in the case of straddling. The grasping process may also be configured to be performed before starting the accessory opening/closing game.

(24) In the above-described second embodiment, the notification is made so that the player can recognize the number of reserves that can be added. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the player can be notified whether or not the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state after the end of the mode. Further, it may be configured to notify the player so that the player can recognize how many times the general electric accessory 34a is opened after the mode ends. In these cases, without grasping the number of pending additions, whether or not the accessory opening and closing game continues even after the end of the high-frequency support mode, and whether the general electric accessory 34a becomes open information after the end of the mode It is also possible to have a configuration in which the notification is made while only grasping the situation.

In addition, after the end of the high-frequency support mode, it may be possible to make a notification that the player can recognize whether or not the winning to the second operation port 34 can occur. A configuration may be adopted in which a notification that is recognizable by a person is performed. As for the latter, it is preferable to grasp the number of times the general electric accessory 34a is opened after the end of the mode, and notify the number of times as the number of times a prize can be won.

(25) In the second embodiment, when the comprehended addable reservation number SA is 1 or more, the special effect is always executed, but it is determined that the addable reservation number SA is 1 or more. After that, lottery processing may be performed to determine whether or not the special performance should be executed, and the special performance may be executed when winning the lottery. That is, when the addable reservation number SA is 1 or more, the special effect may be executed more easily than otherwise.

Further, when the addable reservation number SA is not 1 or more (when it is 0), a special effect may be executed. In this case, it may be configured such that it is always executed, or it may be configured that it is executed when a lottery process for whether or not to execute a special effect is won. In this case, the notification of the number of pending additions that can be added is 0.

(26) In the above-described second embodiment, the number of remaining balls up to the maximum winning number and the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game may be notified so that the player can recognize it. By adopting such a configuration, the player can recognize the end (time limit) in which the pending information can be added, and it is convenient for the player to play the game aiming at the reported number of possible additions.

(27) In the above-described second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a smaller number than the grasped actual addable pending number SA is notified. In this case, after the special effect is executed, more additions may occur than the possible number of additions indicated by the effect. As a result, the player's sense of accomplishment and joy can be enhanced, and it is possible to favorably enhance interest. In such a configuration, the notification may be always performed, or the actual addable pending number SA may be notified or a small number may be notified at random. However, in the former case, the player will eventually notice, which may lead to a decrease in the reliability of the notification, and the performance effect may gradually fade, so the latter configuration is preferable.

(28) In the above-described second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a special effect is executed when the comprehended addable reservation number SA is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This is because, if a small number is reported, the player may be discouraged or lose the desire to play. For example, if the addable reservation number SA is 2 or more, a special effect is executed, and if it is less than that, it is not executed. In this case, a specific effect may be performed without notifying the number of pending additions. This is because the occurrence of the effect allows the player to recognize or guess that a predetermined number (for example, two) or more of the pending information can be added.

(29) In the second embodiment, the special effect is started at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Specifically, at the start timing of the accessory opening/closing game, the remaining period of the final game cycle or the remaining period until the end of the high-frequency support mode is grasped, and whether the grasped period is less than or equal to the executable period of the accessory opening/closing game. determine whether or not Then, when it is determined that the period is shorter than the executable period, the special performance is started, and otherwise, the special performance is not started. In this case, the player can switch the shooting mode of the game ball with the start of the special effect as a guideline, which is convenient.

In such a configuration, as a special effect, an operation effect may be executed to prompt the player to operate the effect button (an operation means that the player can operate). In this case, it is expected that the player releases the shooting handle 60 by the effect to stop the player's shooting, and that the second opening/closing pattern can be performed without the player's awareness. At that time, the effect button should be arranged near the side of the firing handle 60 (on the right side of the pachinko machine 10).

Further, in the configuration of (29) above, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a special effect is started in consideration of the required period from the timing of launching the game ball until the game ball reaches the second operation opening 34 or the general electric role 34a. good. Specifically, the timing retroactive to the start timing of the special effect in (29) by a period equal to or longer than the required period is set as the start timing of the special effect.

(30) In the above-described second embodiment, the special effect is performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 41. However, it may be configured to be performed on the display unit provided in the universal electrical accessory 34a or its peripheral part. good. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the universal electric accessory 34a and the special effect at the same time. Note that the notification in this case does not necessarily have to be an image display. For example, a light-emitting unit as the display unit may be provided, and the notification may be performed based on the emitted light color, emitted light intensity, the number of lit light-emitting elements, and the like. . Further, the display portion may be provided in the second operating port 34 or its peripheral portion.

Further, in the above configuration, the display portion may be provided at a location other than the universal electrical accessory 34a or its peripheral portion (second operating port 34 or its peripheral portion). In this case, the display unit is arranged at a position closer to the central part of the display screen G of the pattern display device 41 or the game board 24 than the display unit 44 for the normal pattern, and is closer to the display unit 44 for the normal pattern from the viewpoint of the player. It should be easily noticeable.

(31) In the second embodiment, the elapsed period (degree of progress) from the start of the accessory opening/closing game is grasped. ) may be grasped. It should be noted that the "progress" of the present invention can be understood to include not only the degree of progress but also the degree of remaining.

(32) In the fourth embodiment, the second notification (character display of "Chance!") as the predetermined notification 521 may not be executed.

(33) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the first notification (character display of "great chance!") is always performed when the remaining period Tm2 is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. may be Specifically, when the remaining period Tm2 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, a lottery process may be performed to determine whether or not to perform the first notification, and the first notification may be performed when the lottery is won. In this case, if the lottery is not won, the second notification may be made, or the special effect itself may not be executed.

(34) In the above-described fourth embodiment, after the end of the high-frequency support mode and before the end of the accessory opening/closing game straddling the end of the mode, the special effect may be started at a predetermined timing. good. In the special effect in this case, notification corresponding to the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game at the timing of starting the effect is performed. In addition, such a special effect may be configured to always be performed, and the case of starting at the time of the start of the confirmation display of the final game round (before the end of the high-frequency support mode) and the case of starting at the predetermined timing are randomly selected. It is good also as a structure which arises.

(35) In the above-described fourth embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the remaining period of the accessory opening/closing game is further performed in the special effect. For example, it is conceivable to display a countdown, or change the character's facial expression when the remaining period is less than or equal to a predetermined period (for example, change to an impatient facial expression). This also applies to the second and third embodiments.

(36) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration may be such that the first high winning accessory opening/closing game (a role opening/closing game whose executable period is shorter than the fixed display time of the final game cycle) is not provided. In other words, only the accessory opening/closing game having a longer executable period than the fixed display time of the final game round may be provided. Even in this case, whether or not the reservation information can be added depends on the execution timing of the accessory opening/closing game, and the game can be enjoyed after the high-frequency support mode ends.

(37) In the fifth embodiment, all or two of the first to third high winning accessory opening/closing games have the same opening/closing control mode (only the number of times of opening/closing control is different). A configuration may be adopted in which it is not possible to identify or guess which aspect the character object 34a is in by looking at its movement.

(38) In the fifth embodiment, the selection ratio of the first high-winning accessory opening/closing game, in which the addition of reserved information is not allowed, is the highest. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate of the 3 high winning accessory opening/closing game is the highest. This also applies to the selection ratio of the fixed display time in the sixth embodiment.

(39) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the general pattern game round effect is performed in the display area P of the pattern display device 41, but it is also possible to use a light emitting device such as an LED to execute the general pattern game round effect. good. In this case, the light-emitting device may be provided on the general electrical accessory 34a or its peripheral portion. As a result, the player can simultaneously view the universal electric accessory 34a and the universal diagram game round effect. Also, the light emitting device may be provided in the second working port 34 or its peripheral portion.

(40) In the fifth embodiment, even if any of the first to third winning accessory opening and closing games is performed, the normal figure game round production of the normal figure display area P , the same stop result is stop-displayed, but different stop results may be stop-displayed corresponding to the type of the accessory opening/closing game to be executed.

(41) In the above fifth embodiment, the length of the executable period of the opening and closing game is set based on the fixed display time of the normal game round, but since the fixed display time is very short, it should be considered. It is good also as the structure which does not carry out.

(42) In the fifth embodiment, the high-frequency support mode may end during the final game round display or during the variable display. This also applies to the sixth and seventh embodiments.

(43) In the sixth embodiment, the fixed display time may be selected separately from the variable display time. In this case, a selection table for the fixed display time may be provided separately from the variable display time table. The processing may be configured to be performed separately from the variable display time selection processing. In these cases, the variation type counter CS may be used as the acquired random number for selecting the fixed display time, or a dedicated random number for selecting the fixed display time may be used.

(44) In the sixth embodiment, the fixed display time selected at the start of the variable display may be changed at the start of the fixed display or in the middle of the fixed display.

(45) In the sixth embodiment, the configuration is such that the fixed display time is selected regardless of the number of reservations RbN of the second special figure. Or 3 less than the upper limit number) or more, a short fixed display time is selected or is likely to be selected, and the selection mode of the variable probability display time may be switched according to the number of reservations RbN. In this case, it is possible to suitably arouse the player's desire to increase the number of reservations RbN.

(46) In the sixth embodiment, when the short fixed display time (for example, 9 sec) is selected, the pattern display device 41 is displayed more than when the long fixed display time (15 sec) is selected. The start timing of the temporary stop display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G may be advanced. For example, when the short fixed display time is selected, the total period of the temporary stop display period (the period from the start of the temporary stop display to the start of the fixed display) and the fixed display time is the long fixed display time. It may be the same, approximately the same, or longer than the display time if selected. While it is assumed that the player is paying attention to the conspicuous display screen G, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to make it appear as if the fixed display time for which the addition of the hold information is impossible has been selected, and then hold the hold information. Addition of information can occur. This suitably arouses the player's surprise and joy, making it possible to improve the amusement.

(47) In the seventh embodiment, the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stop-displayed and when the stop results SD6-SD11 are stop-displayed are the same number (5R). , which can be different. For example, the number of rounds of the former may be larger than that of the latter, so that the player in the jackpot game state is more advantageous when the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stopped and displayed. As a result, the type of stop result affects not only the degree of advantage in the game after the end of the high-frequency support mode, but also the degree of advantage in the jackpot game, increasing the importance of the stop result that is stopped and displayed. can.

Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the standard number of game times to end in the high-frequency support mode differs between when the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stop-displayed and when the stop results SD6-SD11 are stop-displayed. In this case, the termination reference number of times for the former may be greater than that for the latter, or vice versa. In the former case, it is more advantageous if the stop results SD0 to SD5 are stopped and displayed, and in the latter case, the shortage compared to the case where the stop results SD6 to SD11 are stopped and displayed is compensated for by playing the game after the mode ends. It is possible to realize the playability of filling or reducing at.

(48) In the seventh embodiment, the variable display time table referred to when selecting the fixed display time is switched according to the type of stop result. The variable display time table may be switched depending on how many times the jackpot is counted from a predetermined timing.

(49) In the seventh embodiment, the change display time tables B1 and B2 to be referred to are switched according to the type of stop result of the special figure display unit 43 only at the time of the first hit (first special figure jackpot). However, if the stop result of the first special figure at the time of the first hit is the stop result SD0 to SD5, after that, continue to refer to the variable display time table B1 until the loop in the specific state ends, and at the time of the first hit If the stop result of the first special figure is the stop result SD6 to SD11, after that, it may be configured to continue to refer to the variable display time table B2 until the specific state loop ends.

(50) In the seventh embodiment, the change display time table for the second special figure to be referred to in the specific state is switched according to the type of stop result of the first special figure. Depending on the type of stop result (big win pattern or small win pattern), the variable display time table to be referred to in a specific state after the big win game or V big win game corresponding to the stop result may be switched.

(51) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when a ball enters and results in a big win, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, a mahjong ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the pachinko machine and the slot machine are provided with a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated to start rotation of the reels. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
If the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means capable of granting a privilege (jackpot game) to the player (transition to the jackpot game state by the main control device 81) function to perform processing) and
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entry portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, termination means for ending the variable acceptance control (executing the accessory opening and closing process by the main controller 81 function) and
with
The aspect of the variable acceptance control includes a multiple-time aspect in which the switching control can be performed multiple times, and the multiple-time aspect includes a first switching aspect in which the switching control is performed at least once ( After executing the first switching pattern), it is possible to execute a second switching mode (second switching pattern) that is different from the first switching mode and in which the switching control is performed at least once. Includes a specific mode (high winning role opening and closing game),
The gaming machine, wherein the first switching mode is a mode in which the upper limit number of game balls can be entered into the ball entering section from the time the first switching mode is started until the first switching mode is finished.

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the ball-entering portion, the grant determination is executed, and if the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information, the player is awarded the privilege. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game with the aim of entering the ball-entering club in order to obtain the privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (the state in which the game ball cannot be accepted or is difficult to be accepted by the ball entering portion) to the first state (the game ball can be accepted by the ball entering portion). or easy-to-accept state), and thereafter, variable acceptance control is executed in which switching control to the second state is executed at least once. In this case, since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering portion, the frequency of the award determination increases, and the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, as one aspect of the variable acceptance control, there is a specific mode in which the switching control is performed in the second switching mode after the switching control is performed in the first switching mode. Further, the first switching mode is a mode in which an upper limit number of game balls can enter the ball entering portion. When the upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entering portion, the variable acceptance control is terminated. When the game ball continues to be shot, the variable acceptance control ends before the switching control in the second switching mode is started, and the switching control in the second switching mode is not executed. On the other hand, while the switching control is being executed in the first switching mode, if the player does not shoot the game ball or shoots the game ball in a mode that does not reach the ball entering portion, the first switching mode Even if the switching control is executed, the number of game balls entering the ball entering section does not reach the upper limit number, and the variable acceptance control is not terminated. That is, switching control is executed in the second switching mode. In this way, it is possible to select whether to aim at entering the ball into the ball-entering section under the first switching mode or under the second switching mode, depending on the shooting mode of the game ball. As a result, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and the interest and the degree of concentration on the game are favorably increased compared to a game in which the player simply aims to enter the ball into the ball-entering section while the variable acceptance control is being executed. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. When the first switching mode performs the switching control a plurality of times, the period of the first state in each switching control of the first switching mode is the same, or one of the switching controls The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the period of the first state of the switching control is different from the period of the first state in the other switching control or one of the switching controls.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to achieve a practically preferable aspect in realizing the configuration of the feature A1.

Feature A3. The second switching mode is a mode in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering section than in the first switching mode, or in which the frequency of ball-entering the ball-entering section is more likely to be lower than in the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, characterized in that

When a game ball enters the ball entry portion in a situation where a predetermined number of judgment information is stored in the information storage means, the information for judgment is acquired for the entered ball, or the acquired judgment information is transferred to the information storage means. There is a game machine that treats invalid ball entry as an object of memory. By adopting the configuration of this feature in such a gaming machine, when a game ball is shot in a mode in which the second switching control is executed, the game ball enters the ball entering section while suppressing the occurrence of invalid ball entering. It becomes possible to make a ball. This makes it possible to efficiently replenish the determination information.

In addition, regarding this feature, "When the switching control is performed a plurality of times in the second switching mode, is the period of the first state the same in each switching control of the second switching mode?" or the period of the first state of one of the switching controls among the switching controls is different from the period of the first state of the other switching control or the other one of the switching controls." may apply.

Feature A4. When a game ball enters the ball entering portion in a situation where the predetermined number of the judgment information is stored in the information storage means, acquisition of the judgment information based on the entering ball or based on the entering ball is configured to be a non-target entry (invalid winning) that does not store the judgment information acquired by the above information storage means,
The characteristics A1 to A3, wherein the second switching mode is a mode in which the non-target ball is less likely to occur than in the first switching mode, or the occurrence frequency of the non-target ball is likely to be low. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the above configuration, when a game ball enters the ball entry portion in a situation where a predetermined number of judgment information is stored in the information storage means, the information for judgment of the entered ball is acquired or acquired judgment information information. Since the second switching mode is a configuration in which the non-target ball is not stored in the storage means, the second switching mode is a mode in which the non-target ball is less likely to occur or more likely to occur less frequently than the first switching mode. When the game ball is shot in the mode in which the second switching control is executed, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion while suppressing the occurrence of invalid ball entering. This makes it possible to efficiently replenish the determination information.

Feature A5. The terminating means terminates the variable acceptance control when the upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entering portion regardless of whether or not the non-target entering ball is entered. The gaming machine according to feature A4.

In this configuration, even if the ball entering the ball entering portion is a non-objective ball, the number of balls is counted, and even if the ball is a non-objective ball, it becomes a factor to reduce the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit. In such a configuration, the configuration of feature A4 suppresses a decrease in the number of remaining balls due to non-targeted balls, and can ensure a long execution period of the second switching mode. This makes it possible to increase the chances of supplementing the determination information.

Feature A6. When the variable receiving means is in the second state, ball receiving means (upper surface portion 702a of shutter 702) capable of receiving a game ball is provided,
The variable receiving means receives the game ball received by the ball receiving means into the ball entering portion when the variable receiving means is switched from the second state to the first state by the variable reception control means. It has a possible configuration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized by comprising staying means (projections 703, 704) capable of causing game balls to stay in the ball receiving means.

In the above configuration, a game ball shot while the variable receiving means is in the second state stays on the ball receiving means for a certain period of time, and the game ball is switched to the first state of the variable receiving means. It is led to the entering ball part along with. Therefore, even if the player continues to shoot game balls in a situation where the second switching mode is executed, the generation of useless balls can be suppressed. In other words, while suppressing the occurrence of inconveniences such as forcing a special operation to shoot game balls in anticipation of the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, or incurring disadvantages to the player due to the occurrence of wasted balls, It is possible to exhibit the above effects of the features A1 to A5.

Feature A7. The variable acceptance control means
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation (situation in which the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114) in which a predetermined specific condition is established, the variable acceptance control for establishment (Accessory opening and closing game for high frequency support mode) can be executed first control means (function to execute normal figure game state transition processing by main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not established (the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is performed. Second control means (main controller 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for low frequency support mode) for failure to accept game balls in the entry ball section function) and
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the mode in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times among the modes of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes the specific mode.

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed. It becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to receive the grant determination, and the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner. Under such a configuration, since the mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode, when the player plays in the first situation, the game ball is shot aiming at entering the ball entering section. If continued, the ball enters the ball-entering portion frequently due to the implementation of the first switching mode. Therefore, the effects of the features A1 to A6 can be achieved while suppressing the number of pieces of judgment information stored (the number of pending pieces) in the first situation from becoming 0 or abruptly decreasing.

In addition, in this feature, in accordance with the timing when the first situation ends (the timing of switching from the first situation to the second situation), the second switching mode is executed from the firing mode in which the ball is entered in the first switching mode. By switching to the firing mode, part or all of the second switching mode can be executed after the second situation is reached. Therefore, by applying this feature to the above feature A3 or feature A4, it is possible to efficiently replenish the determination information after the second situation occurs. Furthermore, in the feature A1 on which the feature A3 or feature A4 is premised, the first switching mode is executed prior to the second switching mode, and the first switching mode allows the upper limit number of balls to be entered into the ball-entering section. Since it is a mode, the occurrence of the second switching mode in the first situation is preferably suppressed, and the demerit of the second switching mode (the number of pending memories of information for determination is likely to decrease) is eliminated. can be done. With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game that can efficiently replenish the determination information after the second situation while suppressing adverse effects on the game during the first situation.

Feature A8. At least when the second situation occurs during execution of the variable acceptance control in the specific mode, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which further determination information can be added after the second situation has occurred.

Feature A9. The variable acceptance control means, at least when the second situation occurs during the execution of the variable acceptance control of the specific mode, until the upper limit number of game balls are entered into the ball entering section, the The gaming machine according to feature A7 or feature A8, wherein the variable acceptance control can be continued.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which further addition of information for determination is possible after the second situation occurs, and furthermore, it is possible to execute the second switching mode to the end. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably ensure the supplementary opportunity (additional opportunity) of the determination information.

Feature A10. Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by main control device 81) for executing the game round,
It is possible to execute the game times in parallel with the variable acceptance control,
The second switching mode is a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the ball-entering section during the execution period of a predetermined game cycle that is executed after the second situation is reached. The game machine according to any one of features A7 to A9, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the second switching mode can be executed across a predetermined game round, and the second switching mode can be continued even after the start of the next game round. In the information storage means, the number of determination information stored decreases by one when a game round is started. It becomes possible to replenish the information for determination also to the . That is, it becomes possible to replenish (add) the determination information a plurality of times, and it is possible to suitably liven up the game after the end of the first situation.

Feature A11. The second switching mode is a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the ball-entering section during the execution period of the first game round after the second situation is reached. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein:

According to the above configuration, the second switching mode can be continued across the first game round after the second situation occurs, and the determination information can be supplemented multiple times. It becomes possible to realize it suitably.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A10 or feature A11, wherein the execution period of a game cycle is the sum of a pattern variable display period in the game cycle and a pattern stop display period in the game cycle.

In the above configuration, the execution period of the game cycle is the total period of the pattern variable display period and the stop display period, and each of these periods is appropriately set, or the pattern of the second switching mode is set in relation to these periods. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably realize the configuration of the feature A10 or feature A11.

Feature A13. The mode of the variable acceptance control for failure includes a predetermined mode (low winning accessory opening and closing game) different from the specific mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A7 to A12, wherein in the second switching mode, the ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering section than in the predetermined mode.

According to the above configuration, even though it was possible to cause the second switching mode to occur after the second situation, the occurrence of an event in which the ball does not enter the ball-entering section at the same level as in the second situation. can be suppressed, and the significance of the second switching mode can be favorably ensured. As a result, the motivation to cause the second switching mode after the second situation is reached is preferably increased, and the amusement of the game can be greatly enhanced compared to the case where the game is simply digested under the first situation. be possible. Further, since the specific mode is implemented as one mode of the variable acceptance control under the first situation, the second switching mode is not limited to after the second situation, but also in the game under the first situation. Although it may occur, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the number of pieces of determination information stored from becoming zero or from suddenly decreasing.

Feature A14. Characteristic features A7 to A13 characterized by comprising payout means (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of paying out a specific number of game balls when the game balls enter the ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the above configuration, while in the first situation, game balls (prize balls) are frequently paid out by shooting game balls so as to enter the game balls into the ball entry portion under the first switching mode. will be carried out on Therefore, the player can play a game in the first situation while suppressing not only the number of pieces of determination information stored but also the number of balls held.

Feature A15. When the switching control is performed once in the first switching mode, the switching control is performed a plurality of times in the first switching mode during the period in which the variable acceptance control is set to the first state in the switching control. When it is executed, the total period of time in which the variable acceptance control is set to the first state in each switching control is equal to or greater than the product of the game ball shooting period of the shooting means and the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features A1 to A14.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a configuration in which the upper limit number of game balls can be entered into the ball entering section from the start to the end of the first switching mode. Further, according to this configuration, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion naturally reaches the upper limit simply by continuing the normal shooting mode aiming at the ball entering portion. In other words, the player can easily realize a game in which the second switching mode is not executed, and the structure can be made easy to play.

Feature A16. In the switching control executed in the second switching mode, the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state is equal to or more than the firing period of the game ball of the firing means and is equal to or less than twice the firing period. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the switching control is included.

In the above configuration, the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state in the second switching mode is equal to or longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball, so that it is possible to reliably cause the ball to enter the ball entering portion. As a result, when the player causes the second switching mode to be executed, the ball does not enter the ball-entering section even though the variable acceptance control is in the first state. It is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the interest of the person. On the other hand, by setting the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state to be less than or equal to twice the firing cycle, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from entering the ball entry portion. As a result, the decrease in the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the inconvenience that the second switching mode ends prematurely and the player cannot enjoy the second switching mode can be preferably suppressed.

Feature A17. Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by main control device 81) for executing the game round,
It is possible to execute the game times in parallel with the variable acceptance control,
The second switching mode is capable of executing the switching control a plurality of times,
When a predetermined game cycle is started after one of the switching control in the second switching mode is finished, the next switching control in the second switching mode can be started during execution of the predetermined game cycle. , an execution interval (standby period) between the first switching control and the next switching control and an execution period of the predetermined game round are set. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the player executes the second switching mode, the judgment information can be supplemented one by one in each round of the game, and the judgment information can be supplemented efficiently. become.

Feature A18. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
If the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means capable of granting a privilege (jackpot game) to the player (transition to the jackpot game state by the main control device 81) function to perform processing) and
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The aspect of the variable acceptance control includes a multiple-time aspect in which the switching control can be performed multiple times, and the multiple-time aspect includes a first switching aspect in which the switching control is performed at least once ( After executing the first switching pattern), it is possible to execute a second switching mode (second switching pattern) that is different from the first switching mode and in which the switching control is performed at least once. Includes a specific mode (high winning role opening and closing game),
The second switching mode is a mode in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering section than in the first switching mode, or in which the frequency of ball-entering the ball-entering section is more likely to be lower than in the first switching mode. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this configuration, in the specific mode, after the first switching mode in which the ball is relatively likely to enter the ball-entering section is executed, the second switching mode in which the ball is relatively unlikely to enter the ball-entering section is executed. A switching mode is executed. This makes it possible to achieve the same effect as the feature A1. It should be noted that each configuration described in any of the features A2 to A17 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature A19. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A variable receiving means (second operation mouth 34 and universal electrical accessories 34a);
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
detection means (second operation opening winning sensor 34c) capable of detecting reception of game balls into the variable receiving means;
Judgment means (role by main controller 81) for judging whether or not a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have been accepted by the variable acceptance means during execution of the variable acceptance control based on the detection results of the detection means. function to execute object opening/closing processing),
When it is determined by the determination means that the upper limit number of game balls have been accepted by the variable acceptance means, termination means for terminating the variable acceptance control (function for executing accessory opening/closing processing by the main controller 81);
Privilege granting means (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to a player when reception of a game ball to the variable receiving means is detected by the detection means;
with
The aspect of the variable acceptance control includes a multiple-time aspect in which the switching control can be performed multiple times, and the multiple-time aspect includes a first switching aspect in which the switching control is performed at least once ( After executing the first switching pattern), it is possible to execute a second switching mode (second switching pattern) that is different from the first switching mode and in which the switching control is performed at least once. Includes a specific mode (high winning role opening and closing game),
A gaming machine, wherein the first switching mode is a mode in which the variable receiving means can receive the upper limit number of game balls from the start of the first switching mode to the end of the first switching mode.

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (the state in which the game ball cannot be accepted or is difficult to accept) to the first state (the state in which the game ball can be accepted or is easy to accept), and then the second Variable acceptance control is performed in which switching control to two states is performed at least once. In this case, compared to the case where the variable acceptance control is not executed, the player is more likely to obtain the privilege, and it is possible to proceed with the game in an advantageous manner.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, as one aspect of the variable acceptance control, there is a specific mode in which the switching control is performed in the second switching mode after the switching control is performed in the first switching mode. Further, the first switching mode is a mode in which the variable receiving means can receive the upper limit number of game balls. When the upper limit number of game balls are received by the variable receiving means, the variable receiving control is terminated. When the game ball continues to be shot, the variable acceptance control ends before the switching control in the second switching mode is started, and the switching control in the second switching mode is not executed. On the other hand, while the switching control is being executed in the first switching mode, if the player does not shoot the game ball or shoots the game ball in a mode that does not reach the variable receiving means, the first switching mode Even if the switching control is executed, the number of received game balls to the variable receiving means does not reach the upper limit number, and the variable receiving control is not terminated. That is, switching control is executed in the second switching mode. In this way, it is possible to select whether to aim for entry into the variable receiving means under the first switching mode or under the second switching mode depending on the shooting mode of the game ball. As a result, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and interest and concentration in the game can be favorably increased compared to a game in which the player simply aims to enter the ball into the variable acceptance means while the variable acceptance control is being executed. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that each configuration described in any one of the features A2 to A18 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the features A1 to A19 is provided as follows: "For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter and a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry section." There is known a variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which a game ball cannot be received or is difficult to be received in the ball entry portion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). With regard to the background art of ".", the problem to be solved by the invention is "Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention paid to games in gaming machines."

In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A19, any one configuration of the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E16, the features F1 to F17, and the features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
If the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the game state transition means (main A function of executing a transition process to the jackpot game state by the control device 81);
Means that can establish a specific condition after the special game state (high frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage area 114e of RAM 114) functions to perform) and
After the specific condition is established, if a predetermined condition (the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC becomes 0) is established, the means for making the specific condition unsatisfied (by the main controller 81 function to execute high-frequency support mode termination processing) and
A player in a game after a second situation in which the specific condition is not satisfied by the operation mode of the shooting means in a predetermined period in the final game round in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied A specific means (a high winning role opening and closing game of the general electric role 34a) capable of varying the degree of advantage;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the ball-entering portion, the grant determination is executed, and if the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information, the player is awarded the privilege. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of entering a ball into the ball-entering club in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed. , It becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering part. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to receive the grant determination, and the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner. The establishment of this specific condition ends when a predetermined condition is established.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, the degree of advantage of the game after the second situation in which the specific condition is not satisfied is determined by the operation mode of the firing means during the predetermined period in the final game round in the first situation. can be made different. The fact that the game has progressed to the final game round in the first situation is the situation immediately before the end of the situation. It is assumed that the player is pessimistic that the situation in which the ball is likely to occur) is about to end, and it is difficult to say that the player is enjoying the game. In this regard, according to this feature, the launching means is not only pessimistic about the end of the first situation, but expects that the game after the second situation will be advantageous in the final game round. can be operated. As a result, the game in the final game cycle is suitably livened up, and it becomes possible to enjoy the game until the end of the first situation. In addition, since the game after the second situation is reached is affected, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game when the first situation ends, and it is possible to favorably encourage the continuation of the game. . Moreover, since the degree of advantage changes depending on the operating mode of the shooting means, the room for technical intervention is expanded, and the degree of interest and concentration on the game can be favorably enhanced. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game. Furthermore, since the final game round is targeted, the game rounds up to the last game round can be played in a normal operation mode, and adverse effects on the original game in the first situation can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, it can be understood that the "operation mode of the firing means" of this feature includes a mode in which the firing means is not operated.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the predetermined period is a partial period of the final game cycle.

In the configuration of feature B1, it is assumed that the player's interest in the operation mode of the shooting means will be very high during the predetermined period. There is a detrimental effect in that interest in the result of award determination and pattern display in game rounds is weakened, and the original significance of game rounds may disappear. In this regard, in this configuration, since the predetermined period is limited to a part of the final game cycle, the game in the final game cycle can be livened up while suppressing the loss of the original significance of the game cycle. .

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the predetermined period is a specific period from the start of the final game round to the final game round or the second situation.

In the above configuration, since the predetermined period is limited to a part of the final game cycle, the game in the final game cycle can be livened up while suppressing the loss of the original significance of the game cycle. In such a case, for example, if the predetermined period is set to a partial period in the middle of the final game round, it may be difficult for the player to play the game and may cause confusion. In this regard, in this configuration, the predetermined period is the specific period until the final game round or the state where the specific condition is not established, so it is only necessary to pay attention to the operation mode of the shooting means at the end of the final game round. As a result, it is possible to make the configuration easy for the player to play.

Feature B4. If the specifying means does not shoot the game ball in the predetermined period or shoots the game ball in such a manner that the game ball does not enter the ball entry part, the second situation is more likely than otherwise. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the game can be made to be advantageous to the player.

In the above configuration, by not performing a shooting operation aimed at the ball-entering portion for a predetermined period of time, the game becomes advantageous after the specific condition is not satisfied. When the specific condition is established, it is natural for the player to actively aim at the ball-entering section and shoot the game ball in order to cause the ball to enter the ball-entering section. Under such circumstances, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to make the operation required in the predetermined period significantly different from the operation up to that point. For example, if the two operations are similar, even if the player intends to perform an operation that should be performed within a predetermined period of time, an event may occur in which such an operation mode is not actually performed, or the operation mode may be erroneous. However, according to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences and make it easier to play.

Feature B5. A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entry portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, the second end means for ending the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing processing by the main controller 81 function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control can be executed across the end timing of the first situation, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls entering the ball entering section from reaching the upper limit during the predetermined period. By adopting this operation mode, the variable acceptance control can be continued even after the end of the first situation, and the variable acceptance means can be placed in the first state. As a result, it becomes possible to add or replenish the determination information, and the game can be advantageously advanced after the second situation.

Feature B6. A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The predetermined period is the period during which the first situation and the variable acceptance means are executed when the variable acceptance control is executed straddling the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that it includes a period of overlap with .

In the above configuration, since the predetermined period is related to the execution period of the variable acceptance control, the player can grasp the predetermined period by watching the movement of the variable acceptance means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the inability to identify the predetermined period or the operation switching timing, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game among the players.

Feature B7. A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entry portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, the second end means for ending the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing processing by the main controller 81 functions to perform) and
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the specific opportunity occurs in the first situation, the first control means (ordinary game state by the main control device 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for high-frequency support mode) for establishment function to execute the migration process) and
When the specific opportunity occurs in the second situation, the variable acceptance control for non-establishment (accessory opening and closing game for low-frequency support mode) is harder to accept the game ball into the entering ball section than the variable acceptance control for establishment ) can be executed second control means (the function of executing the normal game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
prepared,
The mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a multiple-time mode in which the switching control can be executed a plurality of times, and the multiple-time mode includes a first switching mode (first opening/closing pattern). After executing the switching control, it includes a specific mode (high winning accessory opening and closing game) in which the switching control can be performed in a second switching mode (second opening/closing pattern) different from the first switching mode. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein in the second switching mode, a ball is less likely to enter the ball-entering section than in the first switching mode.

In the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control can be executed across the end timing of the first situation, an operation is performed so that the number of game balls entering the ball entering section does not reach the upper limit number for a predetermined period of time. By adopting this mode, it is possible to continue the variable acceptance control even after the second situation occurs. In this case, since the second switching mode is provided in the latter half of the variable acceptance control, it becomes easier to execute the second switching mode after the second situation occurs. In this second switching mode, since it is relatively difficult for balls to enter the ball-entering portion, the decrease in the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit is suppressed, and variable acceptance control (second switching mode) is performed. can continue for a long time. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the determination information can be added or supplemented, and it is possible to advantageously proceed with the game after the second situation occurs. Moreover, in the variable acceptance control, the first switching mode in which the ball is relatively likely to enter the ball-entering section is executed prior to the second switching mode. can be made to occur frequently, and the reduction in the number of pending memories of the determination information can be suitably suppressed. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to suitably liven up the final stage game in the first situation while suppressing adverse effects on the game in the first situation.

Feature B8. Characteristic B7, wherein the first switching mode is a mode in which the upper limit number of game balls can be entered into the ball entering portion from the time when the first switching mode is started until the time when the first switching mode is finished. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to end the variable acceptance control before the second switching mode is executed in a game other than the predetermined period. As a result, the occurrence of the second switching mode in the first situation is preferably suppressed, and the effect of feature B7 can be enhanced.

Feature B9. The second switching mode is a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to allow the upper limit number of game balls to enter the ball-entering section during the execution period of a predetermined game cycle that is executed after the second situation is reached. The gaming machine according to feature B7 or feature B8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the second switching mode can be executed across a predetermined game round, and the second switching mode can be continued even after the start of the next game round. In the information storage means, the number of determination information stored decreases by one when a game round is started. It becomes possible to replenish the information for determination also to the . That is, it becomes possible to replenish (add) the judgment information a plurality of times, and it is possible to suitably liven up the game after the second situation occurs.

Feature B10. The mode of the variable acceptance control for failure includes a predetermined mode (low winning accessory opening and closing game) different from the specific mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B9, wherein the second switching mode is such that a ball is more likely to enter the ball-entering section than the predetermined mode.

According to the above configuration, even though it was possible to execute the second switching mode after the second situation, the occurrence of an event in which the ball does not enter the ball-entering section at the same level as in the second situation. can be suppressed, and the significance of the second switching mode can be favorably ensured. As a result, the desire to execute the second switching mode after the second situation is reached is favorably enhanced, and the amusement of the game is remarkably improved as compared with the case where the game is simply digested under the first situation. becomes possible. Further, since the specific mode is implemented as one mode of the variable acceptance control under the first situation, the second switching mode is not limited to after the second situation, but also in the game under the first situation. Although it may occur, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the number of pieces of determination information stored from becoming zero or from suddenly decreasing.

Feature B11. Effect control means (effect A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, characterized by comprising a control device 82).

According to the above configuration, the player can make the game advantageous after the second situation by identifying the predetermined period based on the specific performance or by switching the operation mode of the shooting means. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the inability to identify the predetermined period or the operation switching timing, thereby ensuring the fairness of the game among the players.

Feature B12. The effect control means comprises means for starting the specific effect at least before the required period of time until the game ball fired by the shooting means reaches the ball entering portion with respect to the start timing of the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized in that

In the above configuration, since the specific effect is executed based on the time required for the game ball fired by the launching means to reach the ball entry portion, it is possible to switch the operation mode of the launching means after watching the specific effect. It becomes a thing, and it can be set as the structure which is easy to play. It should be noted that the actual required period is not necessarily constant, it is considered that there may be variations, so the "required period" in this feature, for example, the average value (for example, the average value when the game ball is fired 10 times) or an expected value in design can be used.

Feature B13. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
If the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the game state transition means (main A function of executing a transition process to the jackpot game state by the control device 81);
with
Means that can establish a specific condition after the special game state (high frequency support flag is stored in various flag storage area 114e of RAM 114) functions to perform) and
After the specific condition is established, if a predetermined condition (the value of the high-frequency game number counter area JC becomes 0) is established, the means for making the specific condition unsatisfied (by the main controller 81 function to execute high-frequency support mode termination processing) and
After the second situation in which the specific condition is not satisfied is caused by the manner in which the ball is entered into the ball-entering section during the predetermined period in the final game round in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied. A specific means (a high winning role opening and closing game of the general electric role 34a) capable of varying the degree of advantage of the player in the game;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the feature B1. It should be noted that each configuration described in any of the features B2 to B12 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the features B1 to B13 is "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, There is known a system in which a transition is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention of the industry.”

In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B13, any one configuration of features A1 to A19, features C1 to C15, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F17, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, privilege grant means (main control device 81 to the jackpot game state) that can grant a privilege (jackpot game) to the player function to execute the migration process) and
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
When the variable acceptance control is started, grasping means for grasping the progress of the variable acceptance control (grasping process of the number SA that can be added by the production control device 82 of the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment function) and
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41 ) to control the notification control means (the function of executing the special effect processing by the effect control device 82 of the effect control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the ball-entering portion, the grant determination is executed, and if the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information, the player is awarded the privilege. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game with the aim of entering the ball-entering club in order to obtain the privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (the state in which the game ball cannot be accepted or is difficult to be accepted by the ball entering portion) to the first state (the game ball can be accepted by the ball entering portion). or easy-to-accept state), and thereafter, variable acceptance control is executed in which switching control to the second state is executed at least once. In this case, since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering portion, the frequency of the award determination increases, and the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, the progress of the variable acceptance control is grasped in the middle of the variable acceptance control, and a specific notification based on the result is executed before the end of the variable acceptance control. . In this case, the player can grasp whether switching control will be executed for a portion of the started variable acceptance control that has not actually been executed yet. In this way, if the player can know in advance whether or not it is likely that the ball will be entered into the ball-entering section after that, it will not only make it easier for the player to have expectations for the subsequent game. , the player can enjoy the game with the goal of achieving a ball entry. As a result, the enjoyment of the game that combines the award determination based on the ball entering the ball entering part and the variable acceptance control that changes the ball entering the ball entering part and the ease of entering the ball is greatly enhanced. It is possible to improve interest.

It should be noted that the present feature "executing specific notification (special effect) before the end of the variable acceptance control whose progress is grasped by the grasping means based on the grasping result of the grasping means" is equivalent to "the above A specific notification (special effect) based on the grasping result of the grasping means is executed before the variable acceptance control whose progress is grasped by the grasping means ends."

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the specific notification is notification that enables the player to recognize whether or not the switching control is to be executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to know in advance whether or not the switching control will be executed during the remaining period of the variable acceptance control that is being executed. For example, when it is indicated by a specific notification that switching control will be executed, the player expects that the ball will enter the ball-entering section during the period in which the switching control is actually executed, You can play by aiming at it. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the desire to play and the degree of concentration on the game.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the specific notification is notification that allows a player to recognize whether or not a ball can be entered into the ball-entering section or is likely to occur. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not it is possible to cause the ball to enter the ball-entering section during the remaining period of the variable acceptance control being executed. For example, when it is indicated by a specific notification that a ball can be landed, the player can expect the ball to actually occur or aim for it during play. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the desire to play and the degree of concentration on the game.

Feature C4. The specific notification indicates whether or not it is possible to add the execution number of game rounds to the number of game rounds whose execution is suspended, or whether or not it is possible to add the storage of the determination information. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the notification is recognizable by a player.

According to the above configuration, the player can ascertain in advance whether or not the number of times the game is executed, in other words, the number of chances of grant determination can be increased by the variable acceptance control being executed. For example, when it is indicated by the specific notification that the number can be increased, the player can expect an increase in the number of times the game will be executed, or play a game with the aim of achieving this. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the desire to play and the degree of concentration on the game.

Feature C5. a first grasping means as the grasping means;
Second grasping means for grasping the decrease timing of the number of determination information stored in the information storage means or the start timing of the next game round (by the effect control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment a function of executing a process of grasping the number of pending additions SA);
with
The notification control means executes the specific notification based on the grasping result of the first grasping means and the grasping result of the second grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

Judgment information is stored only within the range of a predetermined number (upper limit) in the information storage means. does not add new judgment information. Therefore, if the special notification is made by referring only to the progress of the variable receiving means (remaining status), there is a possibility that there will be a discrepancy between the number that can actually be added and the number indicated by the notification. In this regard, in this feature, the specific notification is performed in consideration of the decrease timing of the number of information for judgment stored or the start timing of the next game round (timing of reduction of the number of information for substantial judgment). It is possible to appropriately notify whether or not it is possible to add the number of executions of .

In addition, from the "decrease timing of the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means" of this feature, "the notification control means, based on the grasping result of the first grasping means and the grasping result of the second grasping means, The configuration up to the point where the specific notification is executed by the first grasping means is that after the number of the determination information stored in the information storing means is reduced or the next game round is started, the progress is grasped by the first grasping means. Second grasping means for grasping whether or not the variable acceptance means is in the first state or is in the first state by the variable acceptance control (the second embodiment or the presentation of the third embodiment). a function of executing a process of grasping the number SA that can be added by the control device 82, and the notification control means executes the specific notification based on the grasping result of the second grasping means. can also

Feature C6. Any of the characteristics C1 to C5, wherein the specific notification is notification that allows the player to recognize information corresponding to the number of games that can be added to the number of games whose execution is suspended. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp in advance the number of games that can be added by the variable acceptance control being executed. For example, when a large number of play times that can be added is notified, the expectation for the subsequent game is heightened, the mood is lifted, and the game becomes enjoyable. Furthermore, when the number can be grasped in this way, it is possible to expect or aim for the maximum number of additions during the game, and it is possible to suitably enhance the presentation effect of the specific notification. .

In addition, in the "information corresponding to the number of games that can be added to the number of games whose execution is suspended" of this feature, the number of games that can be added to the number of games whose execution is suspended In addition to the number of games played, it can be understood that the number of memories for determination that can be added (the number of reserved memories) and the like are included. In addition, "information corresponding to the number of games that can be added to the number of games whose execution is suspended" of this feature is "the variable acceptance control whose progress is grasped by the grasping means is completed. information corresponding to the number of game rounds that can be added until the execution is completed, or information corresponding to the number of game rounds that can be added until each game round whose execution is suspended ends".

Feature C7. The notification control means includes means for executing, as the specific notification, notification that allows the player to recognize information corresponding to a number smaller than the actual number of possible additional game times. The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, after execution of the specific notification, more additions than the number of possible additions indicated by the notification can occur. As a result, the player's sense of accomplishment and joy can be enhanced, and it is possible to favorably enhance interest.

Feature C8. a first grasping means as the grasping means;
Second grasping means for grasping the execution period of each game round whose execution is suspended (performing processing for grasping the number of possible additions SA by the effect control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment function) and
with
Any one of the characteristics C1 to C7, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification based on the grasping result of the first grasping means and the grasping result of the second grasping means. The game machine described.

In the above configuration, since the execution period of each game round whose execution is suspended is grasped by the second grasping means, it is possible to grasp the start timing of each game round whose future execution is confirmed. Since the start timing of each of these game rounds is the future timing when the number of stored determination information decreases, the grasped result of the second grasping means and the grasped result of the first grasping means (progress of variable acceptance control) By deriving the number of possible additions based on both, it is possible to derive the number of possible additions so as not to include the ball entering the ball entering section that does not lead to the addition of the determination information. Therefore, it is possible to derive the number of possible additions corresponding to the actual number, and to perform highly reliable notification.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the second grasping means grasps the execution period of each game round when the specific notification is started.

In the above configuration, since the execution period of each game round that is suspended at the start of the specific notification is grasped, the information used for deriving the number of possible additions can have little or no time lag with the notification timing. can. As a result, it is possible to derive an accurate number of possible additions, and to perform highly reliable notification.

Feature C10. The second grasping means, based on each of the determination information stored in the information storage means, information corresponding to the execution period of each game round whose execution is suspended (variable display time and fixed display time, or variable Display time), before each game round is executed (function for executing suspension confirmation processing by the main control device 81). The game machine described.

In the above configuration, since the execution period of each suspended game round is grasped by so-called look-ahead, even if the execution period of each game round is not uniform but fluid, it can be added according to the actual situation. number can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly reliable notification while increasing the degree of freedom in the execution period of each game round.

Feature C11. The variable acceptance control means
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation (situation in which the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114) in which a predetermined specific condition is established, the variable acceptance control for establishment (Accessory opening and closing game for high frequency support mode) can be executed first control means (function to execute normal figure game state transition processing by main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not established (the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is performed. Second control means (main controller 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for low frequency support mode) for failure to accept game balls in the entry ball section function) and
with
When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the grasping means grasps the progress of the variable acceptance control that is executed across the end timing of the first situation.

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs in the first situation, the establishment variable acceptance control is executed, making it easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering section. In this case, the player is more likely to receive the award determination, so that the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner. However, the first situation does not last forever, and ends when the specific condition is not met. Therefore, when the first situation ends, the player is often disappointed, and it is difficult to say that the player is enjoying the game.

In this regard, in this configuration, the progress of the variable acceptance control that is executed across the end timing of the first situation is grasped, and the specific notification is performed based on the result. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to know in advance whether the switching control will be performed after the second situation occurs. In particular, when the specific notification indicates that the switching control will be performed after the second situation occurs, the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering section although the first situation has ended internally. Since the state is extended, the player's mood is lifted and the desire to play is suitably aroused. In other words, according to this configuration, in addition to the above effect of the feature C1, it is possible to obtain a further effect that the game at the end of the first situation is favorably enhanced.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification at least before the first game round after the second situation is started. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp the situation regarding the variable acceptance control after the second situation occurs before the first game round after the second situation starts. become. As a result, it is possible to suitably arouse the player's willingness to play when the player faces the game after being in the second situation.

Feature C13. The game according to feature C11 or feature C12, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification after the stop display of the symbols is started in the final game round in the first situation. machine.

The specific notification relates to the game after the end of the first situation, and if such notification is made before the notification of the grant determination result in the final game round under the first situation, the result of the final game round There is a concern that it may function as an indication of an outlier result. In this regard, in the present configuration, the specific notification is executed after the result of grant determination in the final game round is notified, so it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature C14. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein the grasping means grasps the progress of the variable acceptance control when the specific notification is started.

With the above configuration, the progress of variable acceptance control at the start of the specific notification can be grasped, so the specific notification can be made reflecting the progress at the start, and highly reliable notification can be performed. become.

Feature C15. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A variable receiving means (second operation mouth 34 and universal electrical accessories 34a);
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
detection means (second operation opening winning sensor 34c) capable of detecting reception of game balls into the variable receiving means;
Privilege granting means (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of giving a privilege to a player when reception of a game ball to the variable receiving means is detected by the detection means;
Grasping means for grasping the progress of the variable acceptance control after the variable acceptance control is started (grasping process of the number SA that can be added by the production control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment function) and
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41 ) to control the notification control means (the function of executing the special effect processing by the effect control device 82 of the effect control device 82 of the second embodiment or the third embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the specific trigger is established, the variable receiving means is changed from the second state (the state in which the game ball cannot be accepted or is difficult to accept) to the first state (the state in which the game ball can be accepted or is easy to accept), and then the second Variable acceptance control is performed in which switching control to two states is performed at least once. In this case, compared to the case where the variable acceptance control is not executed, the player is more likely to obtain the privilege, and it is possible to proceed with the game in an advantageous manner.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, the progress of the variable acceptance control is grasped in the middle of the variable acceptance control, and a specific notification based on the result is executed before the end of the variable acceptance control. . In this case, the player can know in advance whether switching control will be executed for the part of the started variable acceptance control that has not actually been executed yet. In this way, the player can know in advance whether or not it is likely that the game ball will be accepted by the variable receiving means after that (and whether or not it is likely that a privilege will be obtained). In this case, not only is it easier to have a sense of anticipation for the subsequent game, but the game can be played with the goal of achieving the above-mentioned acceptance. As a result, it is possible to suitably enhance the amusement compared to the case where the game is played indifferently.

It should be noted that each configuration described in any one of the features C2 to C14 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the above features C1 to C15 is defined as "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there is a ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball can or easily be received in the ball entry portion." There is known a variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which a game ball cannot be received or is difficult to be received in the ball entry portion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). With regard to the background art of ".", the problem to be solved by the invention is "Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention paid to games in gaming machines."

In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C15, any one configuration of features A1 to A19, features B1 to B13, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F17, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A lottery means (a function of performing a winning/failure determination by the main controller 81) that performs a predetermined lottery process based on a predetermined lottery opportunity (a ball enters the second operation opening 34);
When the result of the lottery process is a predetermined specific result (jackpot result), a first shift means (main controller) for shifting to a special game state (jackpot game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. 81 function to execute transition processing to the jackpot gaming state);
with
As a game state, it has a first specific state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state,
A second transition means capable of transitioning to the first specific state after the end of the special game state (function for executing transition processing at the end of the jackpot game by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high-frequency support mode ends in the middle of the accessory opening and closing game), after the end of the first specific state, the second specific state (even after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the accessory opening and closing game state that continues),
The second specific state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific state,
When the second specific state occurs after the end of the first specific state, a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) is executed to execute a specific notification (special effect) corresponding to the duration of the second specific state. A game machine characterized by comprising a notification control means (a function of executing a special effect process by the effect control device 82 of the fourth embodiment) for controlling the.

In the above configuration, when the result of the lottery process is the specific result, the game may shift to the special game state and then shift to the first specific state. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second specific state is entered after the first specific state ends. Although this second specific state is not as advantageous as the first specific state, it is more advantageous than the normal game state, so it is a relief game for the player when the first specific state ends. Furthermore, in this configuration, when the second specific state occurs after the end of the first specific state, the specific notification is performed, so that the player can understand that the second specific state will occur by the notification. As a result, even in a situation where the first specific state is about to end, it is possible to approach the game with anticipation for the subsequent development. Moreover, the specific notification is a notification corresponding to the duration of the second specific state. By knowing the length of the duration of the second specific state, the player can grasp or guess the degree of advantage of the game in the second specific state. , the end of the first specific state can be reached. With the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game even in the final stage of the first specific state, and to improve the amusement.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the continuation period of the second specific state is a continuable period of the second specific state.

In the above configuration, the continuation period is not guaranteed, but only a period that can be continued. You can play a specific state.

In addition, this characteristic is that "the length of the duration of the second specific state may vary depending on the game situation in the first specific state or the second specific state, and the notification control means It is characterized in that a notification corresponding to the continuable period of the second specific state is executed as the specific notification." In this case, the following effects can be expected. The length of the duration of the second specific state may vary depending on the gaming situation in the first specific state or the second specific state. If it corresponds to the period indicated by the specific notification, it is assumed that the period indicated by the specific notification will be relatively short. In this case, even if the specific notification is executed, the player's expectation may not be aroused, or the degree of expectation aroused by the notification may be lowered. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific notification corresponds to the period in which the second specific state can be continued, the specific notification can be executed in correspondence with the relatively long period, and the player's expectation is favorably satisfied. can be evoked.

Feature D3. Means that can change the duration of the second specific state depending on the game situation at the end of the first specific state A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that it has a function of executing asynchronously and redundantly.

In the above configuration, since the duration of the second specific state changes depending on the game situation at the end of the first specific state, it is possible to play the game expecting the first specific state to end in such a manner that the period increases. This enables the player to preferably enjoy the final stage game in the first specific state.

Feature D4. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification before the second specific state is reached.

In the above configuration, the notification corresponding to the duration of the second specific state is performed before the state is entered. For example, when a notification corresponding to a long duration is given, a player can approach the second specific state with a strong sense of expectation, and the disappointment of the player about the end of the first specific state can be suitably reduced. becomes possible.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification just before the end of the first specific state.

The specific notification relates to the game after the end of the first specific state. There is a risk that it will look like an advance notice, or that the player's interest in the first specific state will decrease and the interest in the first specific state will be halved. In this regard, in this configuration, since the specific notification is executed just before the end of the first specific state, it is possible to suppress the specific notification from interfering with the first specific state and to effectively perform the notification. become.

Feature D6. Identifying means for specifying the duration of the second specific state before it becomes the second specific state (function for executing determination processing of the remaining period by the effect control device 82),
The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification based on the identification result of the identification means.

According to the above configuration, the duration of the second specific state is specified in advance, and the specific notification is performed based on the result, so that the specific notification can be appropriately performed.

Feature D7. Identifying means for identifying the duration of the second specific state (function for executing determination processing of the remaining period by the effect control device 82);
Period determination means for determining whether the duration specified by the specifying means is a predetermined period (a period during which the game round of the second special figure can be added twice) or more (by the effect control device 82 A function to execute processing for special effects),
with
When the period determining means determines that the duration is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the notification control means executes a predetermined notification (character display of "great chance!") as the specific notification, or The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the predetermined notification is more likely to be executed than when the period determining means determines that the duration is not equal to or longer than the predetermined period.

According to this configuration, the player can recognize or predict the length of the duration of the second specific state depending on the presence or absence of the predetermined notification as the specific notification. For example, when the predetermined notification is made, the player's expectation for the second specific state is favorably aroused, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D8. The notification control means executes the specific notification after the second specific state is reached and before the end of the second specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the duration is the remaining period of the second specific state.

According to this configuration, the specific notification is executed while pretending that the second specific state does not occur. As a result, it is possible to suitably arouse the player's joy and surprise, and to improve the amusement.

In addition, this feature is "the notification control means includes first means for executing the specific notification before the second specific state is reached, and after the specific notification is in the second specific state. and a second means for executing before the end of the second specific state, wherein the second means executes the notification corresponding to the remaining period of the second specific state as the specific notification. It can also be expressed as "characterized by doing so." In this case, since the specific notification may be made in the second specific state or after the second specific state, the effect of feature D8 can be more favorably exhibited.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the normal game state is entered after the second specific state ends.

In the above configuration, when the second specific state ends, the game returns to the normal game state, so the second specific state becomes the last chance for the player who has finished the first specific state. In this case, as a result of the player playing the game in the second specific state with strong enthusiasm, the significance of the second specific state is heightened, and the effects of the features D1 to D8 can be exhibited more favorably. become.

Feature D10. Equipped with a ball entry portion (second operation port 34) into which a game ball can enter,
The lottery means performs the lottery process based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion,
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation (situation in which the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114) in which a predetermined specific condition is established, the variable acceptance control for establishment (Accessory opening and closing game for high frequency support mode) can be executed first control means (function to execute normal figure game state transition processing by main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not established (the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is performed. Second control means (main controller 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for low frequency support mode) for failure to accept game balls in the entry ball section function) and
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the first specific state is the first situation.

In the above configuration, while the game state is the first specific state (first situation), the player is more likely to receive the lottery by the lottery means, so that the game can be played advantageously. , at the end of the first specific state, the player is likely to be strongly discouraged. Under such circumstances, by providing the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D9, the disappointment of the player at the end of the first specific state can be suitably reduced, and the final game in the first specific state can be enjoyed. becomes possible.

Feature D11. When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
the second specific state is a state that can be executed after the remaining switching control in the variable acceptance control being executed becomes the second state;
The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the duration is a period during which the remaining switching control can be executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably create the second specific state that is more advantageous than the normal game state and more disadvantageous than the first specific state. can be

Feature D12. A lottery means (a function of performing a winning/failure determination by the main controller 81) that performs a predetermined lottery process based on a predetermined lottery opportunity (a ball enters the second operation opening 34);
When the result of the lottery process is a predetermined specific result (jackpot result), first transition means (main control) for shifting to a special game state (jackpot game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function of executing a transition process to the jackpot gaming state by the device 81);
with
As a game state, it has a first specific state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state,
A second transition means capable of transitioning to the first specific state after the end of the special game state (function for executing transition processing at the end of the jackpot game by the main control device 81),
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high-frequency support mode ends in the middle of the accessory opening and closing game), after the end of the first specific state, the second specific state (even after the end of the high-frequency support mode, the accessory opening and closing game state that continues),
The second specific state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific state,
Notification control means (fourth execution A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing special effect processing by the effect control device 82 in the form of .

In the above configuration, if the result of grant determination is a result corresponding to grant information, the game may shift to the special game state and then shift to the first specific state. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second specific state is entered after the first specific state ends. Although this second specific state is not as advantageous as the first specific state, it is more advantageous than the normal game state, so it is a relief game for the player when the first specific state ends. Furthermore, in this configuration, when the second specific state occurs after the end of the first specific state, the specific notification is performed, so that the player can understand that the second specific state will occur by the notification. As a result, even in a situation where the first specific state is about to end, the player can face the game with anticipation for the subsequent development, and enjoy the game even at the end of the first specific state. Become.

It should be noted that each configuration described in any of the features D2 to D11 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the features D1 to D12 is "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, There is known a system in which a transition is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention of the industry.”

In addition, for each configuration of the features D1 to D12, any one configuration of features A1 to A19, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C15, features E1 to E16, features F1 to F17, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
If the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means capable of granting a privilege (jackpot game) to the player (transition to the jackpot game state by the main control device 81) function to perform processing) and
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation (situation in which the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114) in which a predetermined specific condition is established, the variable acceptance control for establishment (Accessory opening and closing game for high frequency support mode) can be executed first control means (function to execute normal figure game state transition processing by main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not established (the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is performed. Second control means (main controller 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for low frequency support mode) for failure to accept game balls in the entry ball section function) and
with
When the first situation changes to the second situation, the first game after the second situation has passed after a predetermined period (the fixed display time of the final game round) has passed since the second situation. is a configuration that can start times,
When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
The mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode in which the executable period of the variable acceptance control is longer than the predetermined period A gaming machine characterized by including a role opening and closing game).

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the ball-entering portion, the grant determination is executed, and if the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information, the player is awarded the privilege. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of entering a ball into the ball-entering club in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed. , It becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering part. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to receive the grant determination, and the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner.

Under this configuration, in this feature, it is possible to start the first game cycle after the second situation occurs after a predetermined period of time has passed since the second situation where the specific condition is not established. It is configured. In this case, after the second situation occurs, a grace period (start waiting period) of the same length as the predetermined period is generated until the number of stored judgment information is reduced by one due to the start of the first game round. be able to. In addition, it is possible to execute the variable acceptance control for establishment across the time of switching from the first situation to the second situation (at the end of the first situation), and to perform the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode whose executable period is longer than a predetermined period (grace period). Therefore, if the execution timing of the variable acceptance control is the timing at which the variable acceptance control is executed across the end of the first situation, and the above specific mode is executed as the mode of the variable acceptance control at that time, The remaining switching control of the variable acceptance control can occur after the start of the first game round. Therefore, it is possible to cause a ball to be entered into the ball-entering section in a state in which the number of stored information for determination is reduced, and it is possible to add information for determination (and by extension, game times). As a result, even though the state of fulfillment of the specific condition has ended internally, it is possible to extend the state in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering section until after the start of the first game round. It is possible for the player to continue playing the game with a feeling of anticipation even after the end of one situation.

Feature E2. The modes of the variable acceptance control for establishment include a first mode as the specific mode, and a second mode in which the executable period is shorter than the predetermined period (the first high winning accessory in the fifth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it includes an open/close game).

In the above configuration, the mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes not only the first mode in which the executable period is longer than the predetermined period, but also the second mode in which the executable period is shorter than the predetermined period. Therefore, even if the establishment variable acceptance control is executed so as to extend over the end of the first situation, if the variable acceptance control is in the second mode, the variable acceptance control is executed before the start of the first game cycle. After the end of the game cycle, switching control does not occur after the start of the game cycle. In other words, in order to enable the addition of determination information, not only the execution timing of the variable acceptance control but also the type of the variable acceptance control at that time are required, and the player's luck is reflected more strongly. As a result, the player's sense of superiority and sense of accomplishment when the addition of the determination information is successfully achieved is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably enhance the interest.

Feature E3. A plurality of types of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode are provided as modes of the variable acceptance control for establishment,
The variable acceptance control means executes the variable acceptance control selected from among the plurality of types of modes,
The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the second mode is more likely to be selected than the first mode.

In the above configuration, the second aspect in which the variable admission control executable period is shorter than the predetermined period is more likely to be implemented than the first aspect in which the variable admission control executable period is longer than the predetermined period. The percentage of cases that end without being able to add is high. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the event that enables the addition of information for determination, and the player's sense of superiority and accomplishment when the addition can be achieved is further enhanced.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3, wherein at least one aspect of the switching control differs between the variable acceptance control of the first aspect and the variable acceptance control of the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control is executed over the end of the first situation, the player observes the movement of the variable acceptance means, so that the variable acceptance control being executed is in the first mode. or the second mode. As a result, it is possible to add the fun of estimating whether or not it is possible to add the determination information from the behavior of the variable receiving means.

It should be noted that "at least one mode of the switching control is different" of this feature may be rephrased as "a period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state is different in at least one of the switching controls". Since the normal state of the variable receiving means is the second state, the first state, which is different from such a state, is conspicuous and relatively easy for the player to notice. Therefore, as in this configuration, by making the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state in at least one switching control different between the first mode and the second mode, the player can easily understand the difference in the behavior of the variable receiving means. easier to notice. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of guessing and make the game easy to play regardless of the player's skill level.

Feature E5. When the number of times of switching control in the variable acceptance control of the second mode is one and the number of times of switching control in the variable acceptance control of the first mode is a plurality of times, The aspect of the switching control at least for the first time in the variable acceptance control is different,
Alternatively, when the number of times of the switching control is a plurality of times in both the variable acceptance control of the first mode and the second mode, at least the first switching control in the first mode and the second mode The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the aspects are different.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to guess by looking at the variable acceptance means only at the beginning of the variable acceptance control, and there is no need to keep looking at the variable acceptance means until the end of the control. It is possible to suppress the fact that the awareness of the game round becomes careless. In other words, the mode of variable acceptance control is estimated from the behavior of the variable acceptance means, while preferably achieving compatibility with the game that enjoys the game round (the game that leads to awarding of benefits by stopping and displaying the stop result corresponding to the award information). You can add fun to play.

Feature E6. A passage portion (through gate 35) provided in the game area and through which game balls can pass;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery process based on the passing of the game ball through the passing portion (function for executing a general-purpose lottery lottery by the main control device 81);
Starting the variable display of the second pattern based on the fact that the lottery process is performed by the lottery means, and stopping and displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is one of the second game rounds; A second game round control means (a function of executing a normal figure game round control process by the main control device 81) for executing the second game round on a predetermined display means or a different display means;
with
The specific trigger is that the result of the lottery process becomes a predetermined result (release result),
The second game round control means stops the stop result in a different display mode when the variable acceptance control of the first mode is executed and when the variable acceptance control of the second mode is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E5, characterized by displaying.

In the above configuration, the second game cycle that triggers the variable acceptance control is executed, and in the second game cycle, the variable acceptance control of the first mode is executed and the variable acceptance control of the second mode is executed. The stop results are displayed in different display modes depending on the case. For example, even though the variable admission control of the second mode should be executed or the variable admission control should not be executed, the fraudulent act is carried out so that the variable admission control of the first mode is executed. If so, the employee of the game hall can detect the fraudulent act by checking the status of the second game round and its stop result. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts.

Feature E7. The number of times of the switching control in the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is a plurality of times,
In the variable acceptance control of the specific mode, after the variable acceptance means is switched from the first state to the second state in the previous switching control, the variable acceptance means is switched to the second state in the next switching control. At least one state in which the variable receiving means is in the second state over a waiting period before switching from state 2 to the first state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein at least one of the waiting periods is twice as long or less than a game ball shooting cycle by the shooting means.

The variable acceptance control of the second mode may be implemented not only at the end of the first situation, but also at the beginning and middle of the first situation. In such a situation, since the length of the waiting period is less than twice the firing cycle of the game ball, during the waiting period of the variable acceptance control of the second aspect, two game balls continuously enter the ball entering section. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of events that do not enter the ball. As a result, even if the variable acceptance control of the second mode is performed while the specific condition is satisfied, the number of pieces of judgment information stored (the number of reservations) is prevented from becoming zero or rapidly decreasing. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game property inherent in the first situation, in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering portion, from being hindered.

It should be noted that the present feature further includes a feature of "providing a payout means (payout device 96 and payout control device 97) capable of paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the ball entering the ball entering section". You may prepare. In this case, even if the variable reception control of a specific mode is executed in a situation where a specific condition is satisfied, a certain amount of game balls are put out, and it is possible to suitably suppress the reduction of the number of balls in hand. .

Feature E8. As the specific mode, a first specific mode (second high-winning accessory opening and closing game) and a second specific mode (third high-winning accessory opening and closing game) in which the executable period is different from the first specific mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein a plurality of types of modes are provided.

In the above configuration, in a situation where the variable acceptance control continues even after the first game round after the second situation is started, at that time, whether the variable acceptance control being executed is the first specific mode, Alternatively, the continuation period of the variable acceptance control after the start can be varied depending on whether it is the second specific mode. This makes it possible to differentiate the number of pieces of determination information that can be added, and to vary the degree of advantage.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein at least one mode of the switching control is different between the variable acceptance control of the first specific mode and the variable acceptance control of the second specific mode.

It is possible to add interest in guessing from the behavior of the variable acceptance means whether it is the variable acceptance control of the first specific mode or the variable acceptance control of the second specific mode.

Feature E10. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the predetermined period is a stop display period (fixed display time) of the stop result in the final game round in the first situation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform the end processing of the first situation (the processing of changing the specific condition from satisfied state to not satisfied state) in accordance with the processing for starting the stop display of the pattern, so that the control processing can be simplified. can be Also, the player can easily grasp the end timing of the first situation, compared to the case where the first situation ends during the variable display or the stop display in the game cycle. Such an advantage is particularly beneficial in the configurations of features E1 to E9 above that utilize variable admission control across the end of the first situation to create advantageous conditions.

Feature E11. When a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the ball entry portion during execution of the variable acceptance control, variable acceptance control termination means (accessory opening and closing processing by the main controller 81) that terminates the variable acceptance control The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized in that it has a function of executing

According to the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control can be continued even after the start of the first game round, how long it continues depends on the state of the game ball entering the ball entering section. Therefore, it is possible to change the length of the continuation period depending on the shooting situation of the game ball, and by extension, it is possible to make a difference in the number of pieces of determination information that can be added. As a result, the player is given the added interest of devising how to play the game, and the interest and the degree of concentration on the game are preferably increased.

Feature E12. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, characterized in that the variable acceptance control can be executed asynchronously and overlapped with game times.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to adjust the start timing of the variable acceptance control by adjusting the timing of the ball entering the ball entrance section, so the variable acceptance control is intentionally started at an advantageous timing. It becomes impossible to let As a result, whether the variable acceptance control is executed across the end of the first situation or whether the variable acceptance control is started at the timing when the duration after the start of the first game cycle becomes longer. It is entrusted to luck, and it becomes possible to ensure fairness of the game among the players.

Feature E13. Whether or not the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game round is determined at the switching timing or the first game. grasping means for grasping before the start timing of the round;
notification control means for executing a predetermined notification before the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round based on the grasping result of the grasping means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, depending on whether or not the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game round after the second situation. A predetermined notification is executed before the switching timing or the like. As a result, the player can know in advance whether or not the variable acceptance control is switched and executed across timings, etc., and the state in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering section becomes the second situation. A game that can be extended until after the start of the first game cycle after the start of the game can be suitably livened up.

Feature E14. When the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round, the notification control means executes the predetermined notification, or the switching timing or the The gaming machine according to feature E13, characterized in that the predetermined notification is more likely to be executed than when the variable acceptance control for establishment is not executed across the start timing of the first game cycle.

According to the above configuration, by executing the predetermined notification, the player can know in advance that the variable acceptance control will be executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game cycle after the second situation. becomes possible. As a result, the player's expectation for the predetermined notification is aroused, and as a result, the player's attention to whether or not the notification is performed is increased, and the switching timing or the first game cycle is determined. It is possible to suitably liven up the game before the start timing.

Feature E15. The grasping means grasps, when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is executed, whether or not the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is executed straddling the switching timing or the start timing of the first game cycle. The gaming machine according to feature E13 or feature E14, characterized by comprising means for playing.

In the above configuration, when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is executed, it is grasped whether or not the variable acceptance control is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game cycle, and depending on the result A predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to know in advance whether or not a ball can be entered into the ball-entering section after the start of the first game round after the second situation has occurred. It is possible to suitably liven up the game before the start timing of the game round.

In addition, when this feature is applied to the feature E14, "the notification control means, when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round, the The predetermined notification is executed, or the predetermined notification is more likely to be executed than when the variable acceptance control of the specific mode is not executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round. Yes.

Feature E16. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, privilege grant means (main control device 81 to the jackpot game state) that can grant a privilege (jackpot game) to the player function to execute the migration process) and
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation (situation in which the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114) in which a predetermined specific condition is established, the variable acceptance control for establishment (Accessory opening and closing game for high frequency support mode) can be executed first control means (function to execute normal figure game state transition processing by main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not established (the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is performed. Second control means (main controller 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for low frequency support mode) for failure to accept game balls in the entry ball section function) and
with
When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
The mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode (fifth embodiment) in which the executable period of the variable acceptance control is longer than the stop display period of the stop result in the final game round in the first situation. 2nd high winning accessory opening and closing game and 3rd high winning accessory opening and closing game) are included.

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the ball-entering portion, the grant determination is executed, and if the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information, the player is awarded the privilege. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of entering a ball into the ball-entering club in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed. , It becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering part. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to receive the grant determination, and the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, the variable acceptance control for establishment can be executed across the time of switching from the first situation to the second situation (at the end of the first situation), and the variable acceptance control 2 includes a specific mode whose executable period is longer than the stop display period of the final game round under the first situation. In this case, if the execution timing of the variable acceptance control coincides with the timing at which the variable acceptance control is executed across the end of the first situation, and if the above-mentioned specific mode is executed as the mode of the variable acceptance control at that time, The remaining switching control of the variable acceptance control can be generated after the start of the first game round after the end of the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to cause a ball to be entered into the ball-entering section in a state in which the number of stored information for determination is reduced, and it is possible to add information for determination (and by extension, game times). As a result, even though the state of fulfillment of the specific condition has ended internally, it is possible to extend the state in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering section until after the start of the first game round. It becomes possible for the player to preferably enjoy the final stage game in one situation.

It should be noted that each configuration described in any of the features E2 to E15 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E16 is defined as "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there is a ball entry section into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball can be received or easily received in the ball entry section." There is known a variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which a game ball cannot be received or is difficult to be received in the ball entry portion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). With regard to the background art of ".", the problem to be solved by the invention is "Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention paid to games in gaming machines."

In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E16, any one configuration of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C15, the features D1 to D12, the features F1 to F15, and the features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
If the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means capable of granting a privilege (jackpot game) to the player (transition to the jackpot game state by the main control device 81) function to perform processing) and
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation (situation in which the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114) in which a predetermined specific condition is established, the variable acceptance control for establishment (Accessory opening and closing game for high frequency support mode) can be executed first control means (function to execute normal figure game state transition processing by main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not established (the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is performed. Second control means (main controller 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for low frequency support mode) for failure to accept game balls in the entry ball section function) and
with
When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
When the first situation changes to the second situation, the first game after the second situation has passed after a predetermined period of time (the final game round confirmation display time) has passed since the second situation. is a configuration that can start times,
Period setting means for setting the predetermined period (function for executing special figure confirmation display processing by the main control device 81 of the sixth embodiment),
The period setting means is
a first means for setting a relatively short first period (determined display time of 4.5 sec) as the predetermined period;
a second means for setting a relatively long second period (fixed display time of 15 sec) as the predetermined period;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the game ball enters the ball-entering portion, the grant determination is executed, and if the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information, the player is awarded the privilege. Therefore, the player can play the game with the aim of entering a ball into the ball-entering club in order to obtain a privilege. Further, in the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs in the first situation in which the specific condition is satisfied, the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed. , It becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball-entering part. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to receive the grant determination, and the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner.

Under such a configuration, in this feature, it is possible to start the first game cycle after the second situation occurs after a predetermined period of time has passed since the second situation where the specific condition is not established. It is configured. In this case, after the second situation occurs, a grace period (start waiting period) of the same length as the predetermined period is generated until the number of stored judgment information is reduced by one due to the start of the first game round. be able to. In addition, the variable acceptance control for establishment can be executed across the time of switching from the first situation to the second situation (at the end of the first situation), and the predetermined period (grace period) can be extended. can be a short first period or a long second period. In this case, depending on the length of the predetermined period, whether or not the variable acceptance control continues until after the start of the first game cycle, and if it continues, the length of the duration varies. For example, if the variable acceptance control continues even after the start of the first game round, it is possible to cause a ball to enter the ball entry section while the number of judgment information stored is reduced, and the judgment information ( By extension, it becomes possible to add game times). As a result, even though the state of fulfillment of the specific condition has ended internally, it is possible to extend the state in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering section until after the start of the first game round. It is possible for the player to play the game with anticipation even after the end of one situation.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the period setting means can more easily set the second period than the first period as the predetermined period.

In the above configuration, it is easier to set the second period than the first period as the predetermined period, so the proportion of cases where the determination information cannot be added increases. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the event that enables the addition of information for determination, and enhance the player's sense of accomplishment and joy when the addition is achieved.

Feature F3. The aspect of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific aspect (third high winning accessory opening and closing game) having an executable period of a specific length (12 sec),
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the first period is shorter than the executable period of the specific mode, and the second period is longer than the executable period of the specific mode. .

According to this configuration, if the predetermined period is the first period, the variable acceptance control can be continued until after the start of the first game cycle, and if it is the second period, the continuation is disabled. It is possible to suitably exhibit the above effects of F2.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the period setting means sets the predetermined period regardless of the number of the determination information stored in the information storage means.

For example, in a configuration in which the first period is set as the predetermined period or the first period is more likely to be set than the second period in accordance with the number of stored determination information being equal to or greater than a certain number, fraudulent attempts to increase the number of stored items When the act is performed, not only is the information for judgment (game round) illegally acquired, but also the first period is set to make the illegal game more advantageous, which encourages fraudulent behavior. I have concerns. In this regard, in this configuration, since the predetermined period is set regardless of the number of memories, even if a fraudulent act to increase the number of memories is performed, it is possible to prevent the effect from extending to the length of the predetermined period. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined period is a stop display period (determined display time) of the stop result in the final game round in the first situation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to perform the end processing of the first situation (the processing of changing the specific condition from satisfied state to not satisfied state) in accordance with the processing for starting the stop display of the pattern, so that the control processing can be simplified. can be Also, the player can easily grasp the end timing of the first situation, compared to the case where the first situation ends during the variable display or the stop display in the game cycle. Such an advantage is particularly beneficial in the configurations of features F1-F4 above that utilize variable admission control across the end of the first situation to create advantageous conditions.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the stop display period of the final game round is longer than the stop display period of each game round other than the final game round in the first situation.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the stop display of the final game round, and this is a preferable mode for realizing the configuration of the feature F5.

This feature can also be expressed as "the first period is longer than the stop display period of each game round other than the final game round in the first situation". In this case, even the shorter first period is longer than the stop display periods of the other game rounds, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop display of the final game round.

Feature F7. Separate display means (symbol display device 41) different from the predetermined display means and having a display area larger than that of the predetermined display means;
After changing the display of the separate display means, the stop result corresponding to or not corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is temporarily displayed, and then the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed. Display control means for controlling the separate display means (function for executing special figure fluctuation display control processing by production control device 82),
with
When the stop display for the first period is performed in the final game round, the display control means starts the stop display by the predetermined display means after the temporary stop display is started by the separate display means. The gaming machine according to feature F5 or feature F6, further comprising means for making the period until the second period longer than when the stop display is performed.

In the above configuration, it is assumed that the player will play the game while paying attention to the conspicuous separate display means. In this case, the temporary stop display is started earlier by the separate display means to lengthen the period of the temporary stop display, giving the impression that the second period (the longer disadvantageous period) is being displayed. to the player. This makes it appear as if a disadvantageous stop display period was selected, and then addition of information for determination can be generated. As a result, the player's surprise and joy are suitably aroused, and it is possible to improve the amusement.

Feature F8. Period information storage means (variation display time) for storing period information (variation pattern information) corresponding to the variable display period and the stop display period of the pattern displayed on the predetermined display means as a period information group (variation display time table) a table storage area 113c),
The period setting means selects the variable display period and the stop display period of each game round based on the selection of one period information from the period information group (special figure game by the main controller 81 a function of executing a spin control process), and setting the stop display period selected by the selection means in the final game round as the stop display period of the final game round. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the above configuration, the stop display period can be selected together with the selection of the variable display period. Therefore, it is possible to realize each configuration of the features F1 to F7 while suppressing an increase in the load of the control processing and complication of the processing configuration.

Feature F9. comprising period information storage means for storing period information corresponding to the stop display period of the stop result as a period information group;
The period setting means selects the stop display period of the final game round based on the period information group, and the selection is made when the final game round is started. The game machine according to any one of F8.

In the above configuration, since the stop display period is determined with a sufficient margin for the start timing of the stop display, for example, an effect corresponding to the selected stop display period is performed before the start of the stop display of the final game round. becomes possible. In other words, it is possible to have a configuration suitable for ensuring performance time.

Feature F10. a first ball-entering portion as the ball-entering portion;
A second ball entry portion (first operation opening 33) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
with
The information acquisition means acquires determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion,
The variable receiving means is provided corresponding to the first ball entrance portion,
The period setting means is
One period selected from a plurality of periods of different lengths (fixed display times of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec) including the first period and the second period is set as the predetermined period. ,
And means for changing the selection mode of the predetermined period according to the game result (type of stop result of the first special figure) of the game round that triggered the transition to the first situation (7th embodiment The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized by comprising a variable display time table B1 and a variable display time table B2).

In the above configuration, by changing the mode of selection of the length of the predetermined period, whether or not the determination information can be added and the number of pieces to be added change in the game after the second situation occurs, and the state in which addition becomes possible. It is possible to create a special state in which the expectations for are given preferential treatment. Since such switching of the selection mode is performed according to the game result of the game round that triggered the transition to the first situation, the player has a strong sense of expectation for such a special state. By holding it, it is possible to play the game round before shifting to the first situation. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase interest not only in the game at the end of the first situation or after the end, but also in the game before the transition to the first situation.

Feature F11. When the determination result of the grant determination unit is a grant correspondence result indicating that the grant correspondence result corresponds to the grant information, the game spin control means sets the grant correspondence stop result (seventh The stop results SD0 to SD11) of the embodiment are stopped and displayed,
The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the game result is a type of the award-response stop result.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the above special state occurs depending on the type of the grant response stop result when the grant response result is obtained. As a result, the game result of the game before the transition to the first situation can be preferably associated with the switching of the selection mode during the period after the transition to the first situation, and the player can select the type corresponding to the special state. It is possible to suitably realize a game property in which the game can be played before shifting to the first situation in anticipation that the result of stopping the provision of .

Feature F12. The period setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period when the game result is a first result (stop results SD0 to SD5), or sets the game result to a second period different from the first result. Equipped with means (variable display time table B1 and variable display time table B2 of the seventh embodiment) that makes it easier to set the first period than in the case of results (stop results SD6 to SD11) The gaming machine according to feature F10 or feature F11, characterized in that

In the above configuration, the shorter the predetermined period, the first period, the easier it is for the variable acceptance control to continue even after the start of the first game cycle after the end of the first situation, which is advantageous to the player. By adopting the configuration of this feature, it is possible to suitably exhibit the above effects of the feature F10 or the feature F11.

Feature F13. comprising period information storage means for storing period information corresponding to the plurality of periods of different lengths as a period information group;
The period information group includes a plurality of period information groups including a first period information group (variable display time table B1) and a second period information group (variable display time table B2),
at least the period information corresponding to the first period is stored in the first period information group;
at least the period information corresponding to the second period is stored in the second period information group;
The first period information group is more likely to be selected than the second period information group, and
The period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the first period information group when the game result is a first result (stop results SD0 to SD5), and the game result is different from the first result. The gaming machine according to any one of features F10 to F12, wherein, when the second results (stop results SD6 to SD11) are different, the predetermined period is set based on the second period information group.

In the above configuration, the first period information group in which the first period (short favorable period) is relatively likely to be selected and the second period (long unfavorable period) are relatively likely to be selected or the first period is A second period information group that is not selected is provided, and which of the period information groups is to be referred to is switched according to the type of game result. Accordingly, it is possible to associate the type of game result and the likelihood of selection of the first period with a relatively simple processing configuration. That is, it is possible to realize each configuration of features F10 to F12 while suppressing the load required for control and complication of the configuration, and it is possible to make it a practically preferable mode in realizing those configurations.

When the feature F12 or the feature F13 is applied to the feature F11, the "game result", the "first result", and the "second result" are replaced with the "grant support stop result" and the "first grant support stop result", respectively. and "result of stopping the second application support".

Feature F14. Whether or not the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game round is determined at the switching timing or the first game. grasping means for grasping before the start timing of the round;
notification control means for executing a predetermined notification before the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round based on the grasping result of the grasping means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F13, characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, depending on whether or not the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game round after the second situation. A predetermined notification is executed before the switching timing or the like. As a result, the player can know in advance whether or not the variable acceptance control is switched and executed across timings, etc., and the state in which the ball is likely to enter the ball-entering section becomes the second situation. A game that can be extended until after the start of the first game cycle after the start of the game can be suitably livened up.

Feature F15. When the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round, the notification control means executes the predetermined notification, or the switching timing or the The game machine according to feature F14, characterized in that the predetermined notification is more likely to be executed than when the variable acceptance control for establishment is not executed across the start timing of the first game cycle.

According to the above configuration, by executing the predetermined notification, the player can know in advance that the variable acceptance control will be executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game cycle after the second situation. becomes possible. As a result, the player's expectation for the predetermined notification is aroused, and as a result, the player's attention to whether or not the notification is performed is increased, and the switching timing or the first game cycle is determined. It is possible to suitably liven up the game before the start timing.

Feature F16. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry portion (second operation port 34) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main control device 81);
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Attachment determination means (a function of executing a correctness determination by the main controller 81) for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to the attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
When the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information, privilege grant means (main control device 81 to the jackpot game state) that can grant a privilege (jackpot game) to the player function to execute the migration process) and
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (common electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched between states,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The variable acceptance control means
When the specific trigger occurs in the first situation (situation in which the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114) in which a predetermined specific condition is established, the variable acceptance control for establishment (Accessory opening and closing game for high frequency support mode) can be executed first control means (function to execute normal figure game state transition processing by main control device 81),
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation where the specific condition is not established (the high-frequency support flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114), the variable acceptance control for establishment is performed. Second control means (main controller 81) capable of executing the variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game for low-frequency support mode) for non-establishment that makes it difficult to accept game balls in the entry ball portion function) and
prepared,
When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
When the first situation changes to the second situation, the first game after the second situation has passed after a predetermined period of time (the final game round confirmation display time) has passed since the second situation. It is a configuration that can start times,
A game machine characterized by comprising variable means for changing the length of the predetermined period (function for executing a special figure game round control process by the main controller 81 of the sixth embodiment).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the feature F1. It should be noted that each configuration described in any one of the features F2 to F15 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

Feature F17. A lottery means (a function of performing a winning/failure determination by the main controller 81) that performs a predetermined lottery process based on a predetermined lottery opportunity (a ball enters the second operation opening 34);
A predetermined display means ( A game round control means (a function of executing a special figure game round control process by the main control device 81) that allows the game round to be executed in the special figure display unit 43);
When the result of the lottery process is a predetermined specific result (jackpot result), first transition means (main control) for shifting to a special game state (jackpot game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state a function of executing the transition processing to the jackpot gaming state by the device 81);
period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 113c of ROM 113) for storing period information (variation pattern information) corresponding to the stop display period of the stop result as a period information group (variation display time table);
with
The game round control means includes selection means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main controller 81) for selecting the stop display period of each game round based on the period information group, and the selection means The stop display of the stop result is performed during the stop display period of the length selected by
As a game state, it has a specific game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a jackpot that triggers transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs), second transition means for transitioning to the specific game state after the end of the special game state (by the main controller 81 A function to execute transition processing at the end of the jackpot game);
A specific means (with an executable period of 12 seconds) capable of varying the degree of advantage for the player in the game after the specific game state ends, depending on the length of the stop display period of the final game round in the specific game state. A configuration that allows selection of fixed display times of 15 sec, 9 sec, and 4.5 sec for a certain third high-winning accessory game);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, when the result of the lottery process is the specific result, the game state shifts to the special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and after the special game state ends due to the establishment of the first condition, the special game state It shifts to a specific game state that is different from the game state and advantageous to the player. That is, the specific game state does not necessarily shift after the special game state ends, but the establishment of the first condition is required as the transition condition. Therefore, when the game is shifted to the specific game state, the player has great expectations for the game in that game state. The fact that the game progresses to the final game round in such a specific game state is the situation immediately before the end of the specific game state. It is assumed that they are pessimistic about that, and it is difficult to say that they are enjoying the game. In this regard, according to this feature, the length of the stop display period of the final game round changes the degree of advantage in the subsequent game, so you can enjoy what kind of length is selected and find the advantageous length. can be played with the expectation that is selected. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to enjoy the final game in the specific game state.

It should be noted that each configuration described in any one of the above features F1 to F16 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the above features F1 to F17 is defined as "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there is a ball entry portion into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted in the ball entry portion." There is known a variable receiving means capable of switching between a first state and a second state in which a game ball cannot be received or is difficult to be received in the ball entry portion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). With regard to the background art of ".", the problem to be solved by the invention is "Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention paid to games in gaming machines."

In addition, for each configuration of the features F1 to F17, any one configuration of features A1 to A19, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C15, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E16, and features G1 to G9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (second operation opening 34) and a second ball entry portion (first operation opening 33) which are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring information for determination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main controller 81); ,
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not the information for determination stored in the information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information (a function for executing the determination by the main controller 81);
Predetermined display means for starting variable display of patterns based on the transition determination by the transition determination means and stop-displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
A first transition means for shifting to a special game state (jackpot game state) more advantageous to a player than a normal game state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition correspondence information. (Function of executing transition processing to jackpot game state by main control device 81);
A second transition means (main control) capable of transitioning to a specific game state (high-frequency support mode) in which a ball is more likely to enter the first ball-entering portion than the normal game state after the special game state ends a function of executing transition processing at the end of the jackpot game by the device 81);
with
When the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the game turn control means provides a transition correspondence stop result (stop results SD0 to SD11 in the seventh embodiment) corresponding to the transition correspondence result as the stop result. is configured to stop displaying the
A player in a game after the specific game state after the special game state corresponding to the transition response result is completed, depending on the type of the transition response stop result when the result of the transition determination is the transition response result. A gaming machine characterized by comprising specifying means (variation display time table B1 and variation display time table B2 of the seventh embodiment) capable of varying the degree of advantage of the game.

In the above configuration, when the result of transition determination is a result of transition correspondence, the game state shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and after that, the ball is likely to enter the first ball entering section. It may shift to a specific game state. In such a configuration, in this feature, the degree of advantage of the game after the specific game state ends changes depending on the type of the transition-response stop result that is stopped and displayed in the case of the transition-response result. As a result, the player can not only stop-display the transition-corresponding stop result as the stop result in the game cycle, but also stop-display the transition-corresponding stop result of the kind that makes the game advantageous after the specific game state. The game can be played with the expectation that the game will be more interesting. Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the type of transition-response stop result is related only to the degree of advantage of the special game state or the degree of advantage of the specific game state. The degree of advantage of the game after the end of the game is affected, and novel game characteristics that have never been seen before can be provided. As a result, a fresh impression can be given to the player, and it is possible to favorably increase the desire to play and the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in this feature, "a specific game state in which a ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry portion than in the normal game state" is "more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state and the special game state. It can also be expressed as "a specific game state different from the state".

Feature G2. When the migration suspension result is a first migration suspension result (suspension results SD0 to SD5), the specifying means provides a second migration suspension result different from the first migration suspension result. Characteristic feature G1 characterized in that the game after the specific game state ends is more advantageous or more likely to be advantageous to the player than in the case of (stop results SD6 to SD11). game machine.

According to the above configuration, the first result of stoppage corresponding to transition is stop-displayed as the result of stoppage corresponding to transition, so that the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous situation after the end of the specific game state, or there is a possibility of doing so. High can be predicted in advance. Therefore, the special game state and the specific game state can be digested with excitement, and the expectation for the game after the end of the specific game state can be suitably increased.

Feature G3. Separate display means (symbol display device 41) different from the predetermined display means and having a display area larger than that of the predetermined display means;
After changing the display of the separate display means, the stop result corresponding to or not corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is temporarily stopped, and then the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination is displayed. Display control means for controlling the separate display means (function for executing special figure fluctuation display control processing by production control device 82),
with
The display control means controls whether the result of stoppage corresponding to transition to be stopped and displayed in the game round is the first result of stoppage corresponding to transition or the second result of transition-correspondence is displayed by the separate display means. The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized by comprising a means for displaying the same stop result as temporary stop display or final display (function for executing special figure variation display control processing by the effect control device 82).

In the above configuration, it is assumed that the player will play the game while paying attention to the conspicuous separate display means. is stop-displayed, the same stop result is stop-displayed (temporary stop display or final display) by another display means. As a result, the player cannot distinguish from the content of the stop display whether or not the game will be advantageous after the specific game state ends, and can enjoy the game by estimating the development after the specific game state. be possible.

Feature G4. A first state provided corresponding to the first ball-entering portion, in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. A variable receiving means (universal electrical accessory 34a) that can be switched to the second state,
Switching control ( Opening and closing control) is executed at least once variable acceptance control (accessory opening and closing game) variable acceptance control means (function of executing normal figure game state transition processing by the main control device 81),
with
The specific game state ends when the stop display of the final game round of the specific game state is started,
The game round control means comprises a period selection means (a function of executing a special figure fluctuation start process by the main control device 81) for selecting a stop display period (fixed display time) for stop-displaying the stop result, and the period selection means The stop display is performed during the stop display period selected by
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the identifying means varies the mode of selection of the stop display period by the period selecting means according to the type of the result of stoppage corresponding to transition. .

In the above configuration, since the specific game state ends at the start of the stop display in the final game round of the specific game state, the number of judgment information stored is 1 by the start of the first game round after the end of the specific game state. A grace period of the same length as the stop display period can occur between the two. In this case, if the variable acceptance control started during the specific game state is executed over the grace period, the switching control can be generated after the start of the first game round, and the addition of the information for judgment is possible. It becomes possible. Further, since the length of the grace period (stop display time) can be changed according to the type of migration support stop result, it is possible to change whether or not the determination information can be added and the number of additions. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the game after the end of the specific game state, and it is possible to suitably realize each configuration of the features G1 to G3.

Feature G5. As the stop display period selectable by the period selection means, a relatively short first period (determined display time of 4.5 sec) and a relatively long second period (determined display time of 15 sec) display time) and has multiple periods, including
When the migration suspension result is a first migration suspension result (suspension results SD0 to SD5), the specifying means selects the first period by the period selection means, or the migration suspension result is The first period is more likely to be selected by the period selecting means than in the case where the second migration response suspension result (suspension results SD6 to SD11) is different from the first migration response suspension result. The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized by:

In the above configuration, when the stop display period is set to the short first period, the variable acceptance control is likely to continue even after the first game round after the end of the specific game state is started, which is advantageous for the player. By the way, by adopting the configuration of this feature, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of the feature G4.

Feature G6. period information storage means (variation display time table storage area 113c) for storing period information (variation pattern information) corresponding to a plurality of periods with different lengths as a period information group (variation display time table);
a plurality of period information groups including a first period information group (varying display time table B1) and a second period information group (varying display time table B2) as the period information group;
The first period information group stores at least the period information corresponding to a relatively short first period (determined display time of 4.5 sec),
The second period information group stores at least the period information corresponding to a relatively long second period (fixed display time of 15 sec),
The first period information group is more likely to be selected than the second period information group, and
When the migration suspension result is the first migration suspension result, the period selection means selects a period based on the first period information group, and the migration suspension result is the first migration suspension result. Characteristic feature G4, characterized in that, when the result of the second transition suspension is different from the transition suspension result, the period is selected by the period selection means based on the second period information group. Or the gaming machine according to feature G5.

In the above configuration, the first period information group in which the first period (short favorable period) is relatively likely to be selected and the second period (long unfavorable period) are relatively likely to be selected or the first period is A second period information group that is not selected is provided, and which of the period information groups is to be referred to is switched according to the type of the transition support stop result. As a result, it is possible to associate the type of transition-adaptive suspension result and the likelihood of selection of the first period as the suspension display period with a relatively simple processing configuration. That is, it is possible to realize each configuration of the feature G4 or the feature G5 while suppressing the load required for control processing and the complication of the configuration, and it is possible to make it a practically preferable mode for realizing these configurations. .

Feature G7. Any of the features G1 to G6, characterized in that even if the game after the specific game state ends is advantageous due to the specific means, it is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above configuration, the game after the specific game state ends is suppressed from becoming excessively advantageous, and the game can be positioned as a bonus game after the specific game state ends. As a result, the superiority of the specific game state is ensured, and it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease or disappearance of the significance of providing the specific game state.

Feature G8. A means is provided for varying the degree of advantage of the player in the special game state corresponding to the transition response result, depending on the type of the transition response stop result when the result of the transition determination is the transition response result. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features G1 to G7.

According to the above configuration, the type of transition-corresponding stop result also affects the degree of advantage of the special game state, so that the importance of the transition-corresponding stop result to be stop-displayed can be increased. As a result, it is possible to strongly arouse the player's expectation for the display of the result of transition-related suspension that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suitably increase the interest.

In place of or in addition to this feature, "when the result of the transition determination is the transition response result, depending on the type of the transition response stop result, the specific state after the special game state corresponding to the transition response result It may be provided with a feature of "equipped with means for varying the degree of advantage of the player in the game state."

Feature G9. A shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 53) capable of shooting a game ball to a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A first ball entry portion (second operation opening 34) and a second ball entry portion (first operation opening 33) which are provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring information for determination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry portion or the second ball entry portion (function for executing winning processing for the operation opening by the main controller 81); ,
an information storage means (holding ball storage area 114b) for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not the information for determination stored in the information storage means corresponds to the transition correspondence information (a function for executing the determination by the main controller 81);
Predetermined display means for starting variable display of patterns based on the transition determination by the transition determination means and stop-displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination as one game cycle. (Special figure display unit 43) game round control means (function for executing special figure game round control processing by the main control device 81) for executing the game round;
A first transition means for shifting to a special game state (jackpot game state) more advantageous to a player than a normal game state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition correspondence information. (The function of executing the transition process to the jackpot game state by the main control device 81);
with
As a game state, it has a specific game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and different from the special game state,
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a jackpot that triggers transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs), second transition means for transitioning to the specific game state after the end of the special game state (by the main controller 81 Equipped with a function to execute transition processing at the end of the jackpot game),
When the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the game turn control means provides a transition correspondence stop result (stop results SD0 to SD11 in the seventh embodiment) corresponding to the transition correspondence result as the stop result. is configured to stop displaying the
After a predetermined period (fixed display time of the final game round) has passed since the end of the specific game state, it is possible to start the first game round after the end of the specific game state,
Any of a plurality of periods including a relatively short first period (4.5 sec fixed display time) and a relatively long second period (15 sec fixed display time) Period setting means set as the predetermined period (function for executing special figure fluctuation start processing and special figure confirmation display processing by main control device 81),
The period setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period when the migration suspension result is a first migration suspension result (suspension results SD0 to SD5), or sets the migration suspension result to the predetermined period. Means for making it easier to set the first period as the predetermined period than when the second migration response suspension result (suspension results SD6 to SD11) is different from the first migration response suspension result (seventh implementation A game machine characterized by comprising a variable display time table B1 and a variable display time table B2) in the form of

According to the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the feature G1. It should be noted that each configuration described in any of the features G1 to G8 can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying these configurations.

In addition, the invention described in the features G1 to G9 is "for example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity, and when the lottery result is a specific result, There is known a system in which a transition is made to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853). There is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the attention of the industry.”

In addition, for each configuration of the features G1 to G9, any one configuration of features A1 to A19, features B1 to B13, features C1 to C15, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E16, and features F1 to F17 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature G group to each configuration of feature group A to feature group G detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 34... 2nd operation opening, 34a... General electric accessory, 43... Display unit for special figure, 44... Display unit for general figure, 53... Game ball launching mechanism, 81... Main controller, 82... Effect control device, 96... payout device, 97... payout control device, PE... game area.

Claims (7)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area based on a predetermined shooting operation;
A ball entry section provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
Information acquiring means for acquiring determination information based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering section;
information storage means for storing the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
attachment determination means for determining whether or not the determination information stored in the information storage means corresponds to attachment information;
Predetermined display means for starting the variable display of the pattern based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, and stop-displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination as one game cycle. a game round control means for executing the game round at
a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the determination result of the grant determination means corresponds to the grant information;
A first state provided corresponding to the ball-entering portion in which a game ball can be accepted or easily accepted by the ball-entering portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be accepted by the ball-entering portion or is more difficult to accept than the first state. a variable receiving means switchable between states;
A variable acceptance control that switches the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state based on a predetermined specific trigger, and then executes variable acceptance control to switch the variable acceptance means to the second state at least once. an admission control means;
with
The variable acceptance control means
first control means capable of executing the variable acceptance control for establishment when the specific trigger occurs in a first situation in which a predetermined specific condition is satisfied;
When the specific trigger occurs in the second situation in which the specific condition is not established, the variable acceptance control for failure to accept the game ball is less likely to be accepted into the ball entrance section than the variable acceptance control for establishment can be executed. a second control means;
with
When the first situation changes to the second situation, the first game cycle after the second situation can be started after a predetermined period has passed since the second situation. and
When the second situation occurs while the variable acceptance control for establishment is being executed, the variable acceptance control being executed can be continued even after the second situation is reached,
A gaming machine, wherein the mode of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a specific mode in which a period during which the variable acceptance control can be executed is longer than the predetermined period. 2. The form of the variable acceptance control for establishment includes a first form as the specific form and a second form in which the executable period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in . 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein at least one mode of said switching control differs between said variable acceptance control of said first mode and said variable acceptance control of said second mode. A passage portion provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery process based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion;
Starting the variable display of the second pattern based on the fact that the lottery process is performed by the lottery means, and stopping and displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process is one of the second game rounds; a second game round control means for executing the second game round on a predetermined display means or a different display means;
with
The specific trigger is that the result of the lottery process becomes a predetermined result,
The second game round control means stops the stop result in a different display mode when the variable acceptance control of the first mode is executed and when the variable acceptance control of the second mode is executed. 4. The game machine according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that it displays. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the predetermined period is a stop display period of the stop result in the final game round in the first situation. Whether or not the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing from the first situation to the second situation or the start timing of the first game round is determined at the switching timing or the first game. grasping means for grasping before the start timing of the round;
notification control means for executing a predetermined notification before the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round based on the grasping result of the grasping means;
6. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized by comprising: When the variable acceptance control for establishment is executed across the switching timing or the start timing of the first game round, the notification control means executes the predetermined notification, or the switching timing or the 7. The game machine according to claim 6, wherein the predetermined notification is more likely to be executed than when the variable acceptance control for establishment is not executed across the start timing of the first game round. .

Images